KMM-X50BT
DIGITAL MEDIA RECEIVER
INSTRUCTION MANUAL
© 2013 JVC KENWOOD Corporation
JS_KWD_KMM_X50BT_MN_03_EN.indd 1
GET0993-001A (MN)
Data Size:
Book Size:
B6L (182 mm x 128 mm)
B6L (182 mm x 128 mm)
5/12/2013 10:14:28 AM
CONTENTS
BEFORE USE
BEFORE USE
2
BASICS
3
GETTING STARTED
4
RADIO
5
USB / iPod
6
AUX
8
Pandora®
9
BLUETOOTH®
9
DISPLAY SETTINGS
14
AUDIO SETTINGS
15
MORE INFORMATION
16
TROUBLESHOOTING
16
INSTALLATION /
CONNECTION
18
SPECIFICATIONS
20
Warning
Do not operate any function that takes your attention away from safe driving.
Caution
Volume setting:
• Adjust the volume so that you can hear sounds outside the car to prevent accidents.
• Lower the volume before playing digital sources to avoid damaging the speakers by the sudden increase of
the output level.
General:
• Avoid using the USB device or iPod/iPhone if it might hinder safe driving.
• Make sure all important data has been backed up. We shall bear no responsibility for any loss of recorded
data.
• Never put or leave any metallic objects (such as coins or metal tools) inside the unit, to prevent a short
circuit.
Remote control (RC-406):
• Do not leave the remote control in hot places such as on the dashboard.
• The Lithium battery is in danger of explosion if replaced incorrectly. Replace it only with the same or
equivalent type.
• The battery pack or batteries shall not be exposed to excessive heat such as sunshine, fire or the like.
• Keep the battery out of reach of children and in its original packaging when not in used. Dispose of used
batteries promptly. If swallowed, contact a physician immediately.
Maintenance
Cleaning the unit: Wipe off dirt on the faceplate with a dry silicone or soft
cloth.
Cleaning the connector: Detach the faceplate and clean the connector
gently with a cotton swab, being careful not to damage the connector.
Connector (on the reverse
side of the faceplate)
How to read this manual
• Operations are explained mainly using buttons on the faceplate.
• [XX] indicates the selected items.
• ( XX) indicates references are available on the stated page.
2
JS_KWD_KMM_X50BT_MN_03_EN.indd 2
Data Size:
Book Size:
B6L (182 mm x 128 mm)
B6L (182 mm x 128 mm)
5/12/2013 10:14:29 AM
BASICS
Faceplate
Volume knob
(turn/press)
Remote control (RC-406)
Attach
Remote sensor (Do
not expose to bright
sunlight.)
Display window
Detach
Pull out the insulation sheet
when using for the first time.
How to reset
Detach button
How to replace the battery
Your preset adjustments
will also be erased.
To
Do this (on the faceplate)
Do this (on the remote control)
Turn on the power
Press B SRC.
• Press and hold to turn off the power.
Press and hold SRC to turn off the power.
( Pressing SRC does not turn on the power. )
Adjust the volume
Turn the volume knob.
Press VOL or VOL .
Press ATT during playback to attenuate the sound.
• Press again to cancel.
Select a source
Press B SRC repeatedly.
Press SRC repeatedly.
Change the display
information
Press DISP SCRL repeatedly.
• Press and hold to scroll the current display information.
( not available )
ENGLISH |
JS_KWD_KMM_X50BT_MN_f_EN.indd 3
Data Size:
Book Size:
B6L (182 mm x 128 mm)
B6L (182 mm x 128 mm)
3
17/12/2013 2:39:50 PM
GETTING STARTED
3
Set the initial settings
1 Press B SRC to enter STANDBY.
2 Press the volume knob to enter [FUNCTION].
3 Turn the volume knob to make a selection (see the following table), then press
the knob.
4 Press and hold
1
Cancel the demonstration
When you turn on the power (or after you reset the unit), the
display shows: “CANCEL DEMO” “PRESS” “VOLUME KNOB”
1 Press the volume knob.
[YES] is selected for the initial setup.
2 Press the volume knob again.
“DEMO OFF” appears.
2
Set the clock
1
2
3
4
Press the volume knob to enter [FUNCTION].
Turn the volume knob to select [CLOCK], then press the knob.
Turn the volume knob to select [CLOCK ADJUST], then press the knob.
Turn the volume knob to make the settings, then press the knob.
Day Hour Minute
5 Turn the volume knob to select [CLOCK FORMAT], then press the
knob.
6 Turn the volume knob to select [12H] or [24H], then press the knob.
7 Press and hold
to exit.
To return to the previous setting item or hierarchy, press
.
While in clock display screen...
Press and hold DISP SCRL to enter clock adjustment mode
directly.
Then, perform step 4 above to set the clock.
to exit.
To return to the previous setting item or hierarchy, press
.
Default: XX
AUDIO CONTROL
SWITCH PREOUT
REAR/ SUB-W: Selects whether rear speakers or a subwoofer are connected to
the line out terminals on the rear (through an external amplifier).
SP SELECT
OFF/ 5/4/ 6 × 9/6/ OEM: Selects according to the speaker size (5 inches or
4 inches, 6×9 inches or 6 inches) or OEM speakers for optimum performance.
TUNER SETTING
PRESET TYPE
NORMAL: Memorizes one station for each preset button in each band (FM1/
FM2/ FM3/ MW/ SW1/ SW2). ; MIX: Memorizes one station for each preset
button, regardless of the selected band.
SYSTEM
KEY BEEP
ON: Activates the keypress tone. ; OFF: Deactivates.
TDF ALARM
ON: Activates the alarm if you forget to detach the faceplate when ACC is set to
OFF. ; OFF: Deactivates.
SOURCE SELECT
PANDORA SRC
ON: Enables PANDORA in source selection. ; OFF: Disables. ( 9)
BUILT-IN AUX
ON: Enables AUX in source selection. ; OFF: Disables. ( 8)
F/W UPDATE
UPDATE SYSTEM/ UPDATE BT
F/W UP xx.xx
YES: Starts upgrading the firmware. ; NO: Cancels (upgrading is not activated).
For details on how to update the firmware, see: www.kenwood.com/cs/ce/
4
JS_KWD_KMM_X50BT_MN_03_EN.indd 4
Data Size:
Book Size:
B6L (182 mm x 128 mm)
B6L (182 mm x 128 mm)
5/12/2013 10:14:30 AM
RADIO
Direct Access Tuning (using RC-406)
1 Press DIRECT to enter Direct Access Tuning.
2 Press the number buttons to enter a frequency.
3 Press ENT IW to search for a station.
• To cancel, press or DIRECT.
• If no operation is done for 10 seconds after step 2, Direct Access Tuning
is automatically canceled.
Search for a station
1 Press B SRC to select TUNER.
2 Press
BAND repeatedly (or press *AM– / #FM+ on RC-406) to
select FM1/ FM2/ FM3/ MW/ SW1/ SW2.
3 Press S / T (or press S / T (+) on RC-406) to search for a
station.
• To change the searching method for S / T : Press
SEEK
repeatedly.
AUTO1: Automatically search for a station.
AUTO2: Search for a preset station.
MANUAL: Manually search for a station.
• To store a station: Press and hold one of the number buttons (1 to 6).
• To select a stored station: Press one of the number buttons (1 to 6) (or
press one of the number buttons (1 to 6) on RC-406).
Change the frequency steps
You can change the frequency step of:
FM: 50 kHz to 200 kHz
MW: 9 kHz to 10 kHz
1 Press and hold B SRC to turn off the power.
2 While pressing number buttons 1 and 5, press B SRC.
Release your fingers from the buttons after the display appears.
• To restore the initial setting, repeat the same procedure.
• When the frequency step is changed, the previously stored stations in
the memory are deleted.
Other settings
1 Press the volume knob to enter [FUNCTION].
2 Turn the volume knob to make a selection (see the following table),
then press the knob.
3 Press and hold
to exit.
To return to the previous setting item or hierarchy, press
.
Default: XX
TUNER SETTING
LOCAL SEEK
ON: Searches only MW/ SW1/ SW2 stations with good reception. ;
OFF: Cancels.
AUTO MEMORY YES: Automatically starts memorizing 6 stations with good reception. ;
NO: Cancels. (Selectable only if [NORMAL] is selected for [PRESET TYPE].)
( 4)
MONO SET
ON: Improves the FM reception, but the stereo effect may be lost. ;
OFF: Cancels.
NEWS SET
ON: The unit will temporarily switch to News Programme if available. ;
OFF: Cancels.
REGIONAL
ON: Switches to another station only in the specific region using the “AF”
control. ; OFF: Cancels.
AF SET
ON: Automatically searches for another station broadcasting the same
program in the same Radio Data System network with better reception
when the current reception is poor. ; OFF: Cancels.
ENGLISH |
JS_KWD_KMM_X50BT_MN_03_EN.indd 5
Data Size:
Book Size:
B6L (182 mm x 128 mm)
B6L (182 mm x 128 mm)
5
5/12/2013 10:14:30 AM
USB / iPod
RADIO
TI
PTY SEARCH
ON: Allows the unit to temporarily switch to Traffic Information. ;
OFF: Cancels.
Press the volume knob to enter PTY language selection. Turn the volume
knob to select the PTY language (ENGLISH/ FRENCH/ GERMAN), then
press the knob.
Selects the available Program Type (see the following), then, press
S / T to start.
Start playback
The source changes automatically and playback starts.
USB
USB input terminal
CA-U1EX (max.: 500 mA)
(optional accessory)
CLOCK
TIME SYNC
ON: Synchronizes the unit’s time to the Radio Data System station time. ;
OFF: Cancels.
• [MONO SET]/ [NEWS SET]/ [REGIONAL]/ [AF SET]/ [TI]/ [PTY SEARCH] is selectable
only when the band is FM1/ FM2/ FM3.
• Available Program Type:
SPEECH: NEWS, AFFAIRS, INFO (information), SPORT, EDUCATE, DRAMA, CULTURE,
SCIENCE, VARIED, WEATHER, FINANCE, CHILDREN, SOCIAL, RELIGION, PHONE
IN, TRAVEL, LEISURE, DOCUMENT
MUSIC: POP M (music), ROCK M (music), EASY M (music), LIGHT M (music),
CLASSICS, OTHER M (music), JAZZ, COUNTRY, NATION M (music), OLDIES,
FOLK M (music)
The unit will search for the Program Type categorized under [SPEECH] or
[MUSIC] if selected.
• If the volume is adjusted during reception of traffic information, alarm
or news bulletin, the adjusted volume is memorized automatically. It
will be applied the next time traffic information, alarm or news bulletin
function is turned on.
and/ or
USB cable from the rear of the unit
iPod/iPhone
USB input terminal
and/ or
USB cable from the rear of the unit
KCA-iP102 (optional accessory) or
accessory cable of the iPod/iPhone*1
Press 5 iPod to select the control mode while in iPod source.
MODE ON: From the iPod*2.
MODE OFF: From the unit.
If you connect the iPod/iPhone to the USB input terminal of the unit
(while listening to TuneIn Radio, TuneIn Radio Pro or Aupeo), the unit
will output the sound from these apps.
6
JS_KWD_KMM_X50BT_MN_03_EN.indd 6
Data Size:
Book Size:
B6L (182 mm x 128 mm)
B6L (182 mm x 128 mm)
5/12/2013 10:14:30 AM
USB / iPod
Select a file from a list
To
Do this
Pause or resume
playback
Press 6 IW (or press ENT IW on RC-406).
Select a file
Press S / T (or press S / T (+) on RC-406).
Select a folder *3
Press
Reverse/
Fast-forward
Press and hold S / T (or press and hold S / T (+) on RC-406).
Repeat play *4
Random play *4
/
(or press *AM– / #FM+ on RC-406).
Press 4 repeatedly.
• MP3/WMA/WAV/FLAC file or iPod: FILE REPEAT, FOLDER REPEAT,
REPEAT OFF
• KENWOOD Music Editor Light (KME Light)/ KENWOOD Music Control (KMC)
file ( 16): FILE REPEAT, REPEAT OFF
Press 3 repeatedly.
• MP3/WMA/WAV/FLAC file or iPod or KME Light/ KMC file:
FOLDER RANDOM, RANDOM OFF
Press and hold 3 *1
*2
*3
*4
to select “ALL RANDOM”.
Do not leave the cable inside the car when not using.
You can still play/pause, file skip, fast-forward or reverse files from the unit.
Only for MP3/WMA/WAV/FLAC files. This does not work for iPod.
For iPod: Applicable only when [MODE OFF] is selected.
For iPod: Applicable only when [MODE OFF] is
selected. ( 6)
1 Press
.
2 Turn the volume knob to make a selection,
then press the knob.
• MP3/WMA/WAV/FLAC file: Select the
desired folder, then a file.
• iPod or KME Light/ KMC file: Select the
desired file from the list (PLAYLISTS,
ARTISTS, ALBUMS, SONGS, PODCASTS*,
GENRES, COMPOSERS*).
* Only for iPod.
• To return to the root folder (or first file), press
number button 5 iPod.
• To return to the previous setting item or
hierarchy, press
.
• To cancel, press and hold
.
If you have many files....
You can search through them quickly (on
step 2 above) at a preset skip search ratio by
pressing S / T.
• See also “Set the skip search ratio.” ( 8)
• Pressing and holding S / T skip songs at
the maximum ratio (10%) regardless of the
setting made.
• For USB: Only for files registered in the
database created with KME Light/ KMC.
ENGLISH |
JS_KWD_KMM_X50BT_MN_03_EN.indd 7
Data Size:
Book Size:
B6L (182 mm x 128 mm)
B6L (182 mm x 128 mm)
7
5/12/2013 10:14:30 AM
AUX
USB / iPod
Direct Music Search (using RC-406)
1 Press DIRECT.
2 Press the number buttons to enter a file
number.
3 Press ENT IW to search for music.
• To cancel, press .
• Not available if Random Play is selected.
• Not applicable for iPod, KME Light/ KMC file.
Select a song by name
While listening to iPod...
1 Press
.
2 Turn the volume knob to select a category,
then press the knob.
3 Turn the volume knob quickly to enter
character search.
4 Turn the volume knob to select the
character to be searched for.
5 Press S / T to move to the entry
position.
You can enter up to 3 characters.
6 Press the volume knob to start searching.
7 Turn the volume knob to make a selection,
then press the knob.
Repeat step 7 until the desired item is
selected.
• To search for a character other than A to Z
and 0 to 9, enter only “ ”.
• To return to the previous hierarchy, press
.
• To return to the top menu, press number
button 5 iPod.
• To cancel, press and hold
.
*
Preparation:
Select [ON] for [BUILT-IN AUX]. ( 4)
Set the skip search ratio
While listening to iPod or KME Light/ KMC file...
1 Press the volume knob to enter [FUNCTION].
2 Turn the volume knob to select [USB], then
press the knob.
3 Turn the volume knob to select
[SKIP SEARCH], then press the knob.
4 Turn the volume knob to make a selection,
then press the knob.
0.5% (default)/ 1%/ 5%/ 10%: Skip search
ratio over the total files.
5 Press and hold
to exit.
Change the USB drive
When a smartphone (Mass Storage Class) is
connected to the USB input terminal, you can
select its internal memory or external memory
(such as an SD card) to playback the stored songs.
You can also select the desired drive to playback
when a multiple drives device is connected.
Press 5 iPod repeatedly to select the desired
drive.
(or)
1 Press the volume knob to enter [FUNCTION].
2 Turn the volume knob to select [USB], then
press the knob.
3 Turn the volume knob to select
[MUSIC DRIVE], then press the knob.
4 Press the volume knob to select
[DRIVE CHANGE].
The next drive is selected automatically.
Repeat steps 1 to 4 to select the following drives.
Selectable items: [DRIVE 1] to [DRIVE 5]
Start listening
1 Connect a portable audio player
(commercially available).
Auxiliary input jack
Portable audio
player
3.5 mm stereo mini plug with “L”
shaped connector (commercially
available)
2 Press B SRC to select AUX.
3 Turn on the portable audio player and
start playback.
Set the AUX name
While listening to a portable audio player
connected to the unit...
1 Press the volume knob to enter [FUNCTION].
2 Turn the volume knob to select [SYSTEM],
then press the knob.
3 Turn the volume knob to select [AUX NAME
SET], then press the knob.
4 Turn the volume knob to make a selection,
then press the knob.
AUX (default)/ DVD/ PORTABLE/ GAME/ VIDEO/ TV
5 Press and hold
to exit.
8
JS_KWD_KMM_X50BT_MN_03_EN.indd 8
Data Size:
Book Size:
B6L (182 mm x 128 mm)
B6L (182 mm x 128 mm)
5/12/2013 10:14:30 AM
Pandora®
BLUETOOTH®
Preparation:
Install the latest version of the Pandora
application onto your device (iPhone/
iPod touch), then create an account and
log in to Pandora.
• Select [ON] for [PANDORA SRC]. ( 4)
To
Do this
Pause or resume
playback
Press 6 IW (or press ENT IW
on RC-406).
Start listening
1 Open the Pandora application on
Skip a track
your device.
2 Connect your device to the USB
input terminal.
Create a new
station
Thumbs up or
thumbs down
Press T (or press T (+) on
RC-406).
Microphone
(supplied)
Rear panel
Microphone
input jack
1 Press and hold the volume
knob.
select [FROM TRACK] or [FROM
ARTIST], then press the knob.
A new station is created based
on the current song or artist.
Save a station
USB cable from the
rear of the unit
* Do not leave the cable inside the car
when not using.
Connect the microphone
Press
/
.
• If thumbs down is selected, the
current track is skipped.
2 Turn the volume knob to
USB input terminal
KCA-iP102 (optional
accessory) or accessory
cable of the iPod/iPhone*
The source changes to PANDORA
FRONT/ PANDORA REAR and
broadcast starts.
You can operate Bluetooth devices using this
unit.
Search for a
registered
station
Press and hold one of the
number buttons (1 to 5) to
store.
• To select a stored station, press
one of the number buttons
(1 to 5).
1 Press
.
2 Turn the volume knob to
make a selection, then press
the knob (or press J / K on
RC-406).
[BY DATE]: According to the
registered date.
[A-Z]: Alphabetical order.
3 Turn the volume knob to the
desired station, then press the
knob.
Adjust the
microphone angle
Secure using cord clamps (not
supplied) if necessary.
If you turn off the unit or detach the control
panel during a phone call conversation,
the Bluetooth connection is disconnected.
Continue the conversation using your mobile
phone.
Supported Bluetooth profiles
– Hands-Free Profile (HFP)
– Serial Port Profile (SPP)
– Phonebook Access Profile (PBAP)
– Object Push Profile (OPP)
– Advanced Audio Distribution Profile (A2DP)
– Audio/Video Remote Control Profile (AVRCP)
ENGLISH |
JS_KWD_KMM_X50BT_MN_03_EN.indd 9
Data Size:
Book Size:
B6L (182 mm x 128 mm)
B6L (182 mm x 128 mm)
9
5/12/2013 10:14:30 AM
BLUETOOTH®
Pair a Bluetooth device
When connecting a Bluetooth device to the unit for the first time,
perform pairing between the unit and the device. Once the pairing is
completed, the Bluetooth device will remain registered in the unit even if
you reset the unit.
• Up to five devices can be registered (paired) in total.
• A maximum of two Bluetooth phones and one Bluetooth audio device
can be connected at any time.
• This unit supports Secure Simple Pairing (SSP).
• Some Bluetooth devices may not automatically connect to the unit
after pairing. Connect the device to the unit manually. Refer to the
instruction manual of the Bluetooth device for more information.
1 Press B SRC to turn on the unit.
2 Search and select this unit model name (KMM-X5*BT) on the
Bluetooth device.
“PAIRING” “PASS XXXXXX” Device name “PRESS” “VOLUME
KNOB” scrolls on the display.
3 Press the volume knob to start pairing.
“PAIRING OK” appears when pairing is completed and “BT” will light
up when the Bluetooth connection is established.
• For some Bluetooth devices, you may need to enter the Personal
Identification Number (PIN) code immediately after searching.
• Pairing request (via Bluetooth) is automatically activated if an iPhone/
iPod touch is connected through the USB input terminal. (Applicable
only if [AUTO PAIRING] is set to [ON].) ( 13)
Press the volume knob to pair once you have confirm the device name.
Bluetooth test mode
You can check the connectivity of the supported profile between the
Bluetooth device and the unit.
• Make sure there is no Bluetooth device connected.
1 Press and hold .
“PLEASE PAIR YOUR PHONE” appears.
2 Search and select this unit model name (KMM-X5*BT) on the
Bluetooth device.
3 Operate the Bluetooth device to confirm pairing.
“TESTING” flashes on the display.
The connectivity result (OK or NG) appears after the test.
PAIRING: Pairing status
HF CNT: Hands-Free Profile (HFP) compatibility
AUD CNT: Advanced Audio Distribution Profile (A2DP) compatibility
PB DL:
Phonebook Access profile (PBAP) compatibility
• To cancel check mode, press and hold B SRC to turn off the unit.
Bluetooth mobile phone
To
Do this
Receive a call
Press
or the volume knob or one of the
number buttons (1 to 6) (or press
on
RC-406).
• All the button illumination flash when there
is an incoming call.
• When [AUTO ANSWER] is set to the selected
time, the unit answers incoming call
automatically. ( 12)
Reject an incoming
call
Press B SRC (or press
End a call
Press
on RC-406).
or B SRC (or press
on RC-406).
10
JS_KWD_KMM_X50BT_MN_03_EN.indd 10
Data Size:
Book Size:
B6L (182 mm x 128 mm)
B6L (182 mm x 128 mm)
5/12/2013 10:14:30 AM
BLUETOOTH®
To
Do this
Switch between
hands-free and
private talk modes
Press 6 IW during a call.
• Operations may vary according to the
connected Bluetooth device.
Adjust the phone
volume
Turn the volume knob during a call.
Phone volume: [00] to [35] (Default: [15])
• This adjustment will not affect the volume of
the other sources.
Switch between two
connected phones
Press
repeatedly.
• Not applicable during a call.
Improve the sound quality during a call
While talking on the phone...
1 Press the volume knob to enter [FUNCTION].
2 Turn the volume knob to make a selection (see the following table),
then press the knob.
3 Press and hold
to exit.
To return to the previous setting item or hierarchy, press
.
Default: XX
MIC GAIN
–20 — +8 (0): The sensitivity of the microphone increases as the
number increased.
NR LEVEL
–5 — –20 (–10): Adjust the noise reduction level until the least noise is
being heard during a phone conversation.
ECHO CANCEL
1 — 10 (4): Adjust the echo cancellation delay time until the least echo
is being heard during a phone conversation.
Text message notification
When the phone receives a text message, the unit rings and “SMS
RECEIVED” appears.
• You cannot read, edit, or send a message through the unit.
• To clear the message, press any button.
Use Voice Recognition
to activate Voice Recognition.
1 Press and hold
The connected phone (which has been paired the earliest) is
activated. However, if priority device is connected, pressing and
holding
activate the priority device. ( 13, DVC PRIORITY)
2 Speak the name of the contact you want to call or the voice
command to control the phone functions.
• Supported Voice Recognition features vary for each phone. Refer to the
instruction manual of the connected phone for details.
• This unit also supports the intelligent personal assistant function of
iPhone.
Bluetooth mode operations
1 Press to enter Bluetooth mode.
2 Turn the volume knob to make a selection (see the following table),
then press the knob.
3 Press and hold
to exit.
To return to the previous setting item or hierarchy, press
CALL
HISTORY
.
1 Press the volume knob to select a name or a phone number.
• “I” indicates call received, “O” indicates call made, “M” indicates call
missed.
• Press DISP SCRL to change the display category (NUMBER or NAME).
• “NO DATA” appears if there is no recorded call history.
2 Press the volume knob to call.
ENGLISH |
JS_KWD_KMM_X50BT_MN_03_EN.indd 11
Data Size:
Book Size:
B6L (182 mm x 128 mm)
B6L (182 mm x 128 mm)
11
5/12/2013 10:14:31 AM
BLUETOOTH®
PHONE BOOK
NUMBER
DIAL
1 Turn the volume knob to select a name, then press the
knob.
2 Turn the volume knob to select a phone number, then
press the knob to call.
• If the phone supports PBAP, the phonebook of the
connected phone is automatically transferred to the
unit when pairing. If the phone does not support PBAP,
“TRANSFER PB” appears. Transfer the phonebook manually.
( 13, TRANSFER PB)
• Contacts are categorized as: MO (mobile), HM (home),
OF (office), OT (others), GE (general)
• This unit can display only non-accent letters. (Accent letters
such as “Ú” is showns as “U”.)
• If the phonebook contains many contacts, ( Select a
contact by name).
1 Turn the volume knob to select a number (0 to 9) or
character ( , #, +).
2 Press S / T to move the entry position.
Repeat steps 1 and 2 until you finish entering the phone
number.
3 Press the volume knob to call.
(or using RC-406)
1 Press the number buttons (0 to 9) to enter the phone
number.
2 Press to call.
VOICE
Speak the name of the contact you want to call or use the
voice command to control the phone functions. ( 11, Use
Voice Recognition)
BATT*
LOW/ MID/ FULL: Shows the strength of the battery.
SIGNAL*
NO SIGNAL/ LOW/ MID/ MAX: Shows the strength of the
current received signal.
SETTINGS
Default: XX
AUTO ANSWER
1 — 30: The unit answer incoming call automatically in the selected time. ;
OFF: Cancels.
RING MODE
SYSTEM: The unit rings to notify you when a call/text message comes in.
(Default ring tone is different according to the paired device.)
• CALL: Selects your preferred ring tone (TONE 1 — 5) for incoming calls.
• MESSAGE: Selects your preferred ring tone (TONE 1 — 5) for incoming text
messages.
PHONE: The unit uses the connected phones’ ring tone to notify you when a call/text
message comes in. (The connected phone will ring if it does not support this feature.)
SMS NOTIFY*
ON: The unit rings and “SMS RECEIVED” appears to notify you of an incoming text
message. ; OFF: Cancels.
* Functionality depends on the type of the phone used.
Select a contact by name
• You can search through the contacts quickly according to the first letter (A to Z),
number (0 to 9), or symbol.
• The second alphabet of the contact will be searched if the first alphabet does not
exist.
1 Press to enter Bluetooth mode.
2 Turn the volume knob to select [PHONE BOOK], then press the knob.
3 Turn the volume knob quickly to enter alphabet search mode.
The first menu (ABCDEFGHIJK) appears. To go to the other menu
(LMNOPQRSTUV or WXYZ1 ), press
/ .
4 Turn the volume knob or press S / T to select the desired first letter, then
press the knob.
• To search with numbers, select “1”.
• To search with symbols, select “ ”.
5 Turn the volume knob to select a name, then press the knob.
6 Turn the volume knob to select a phone number, then press the knob to call.
To return to the previous hierarchy, press
.
12
JS_KWD_KMM_X50BT_MN_f_EN.indd 12
Data Size:
Book Size:
B6L (182 mm x 128 mm)
B6L (182 mm x 128 mm)
17/12/2013 2:40:42 PM
BLUETOOTH®
Store a contact in memory
You can store up to 6 contacts.
1 Press to enter Bluetooth mode.
2 Turn the volume knob to select [CALL HISTORY], [PHONE BOOK], or
[NUMBER DIAL], then press the knob.
3 Turn the volume knob to select a contact or enter a phone number.
If a contact is selected, press the volume knob to show the phone
number.
4 Press and hold one of the number buttons (1 to 6).
“STORED” appears when the contact is stored.
To erase a contact from the preset memory, select [NUMBER DIAL] in
step 2 and store a blank number.
Make a call from memory
1 Press to enter Bluetooth mode.
2 Press one of the number buttons (1 to 6).
3 Press the volume knob to call.
Bluetooth mode settings
1 Press the volume knob to enter [FUNCTION].
2 Turn the volume knob to select [BT MODE], then press the knob.
3 Turn the volume knob to make a selection (see the following table),
then press the knob.
4 Press and hold
to exit.
To return to the previous setting item or hierarchy, press
PHONE SELECT
AUDIO SELECT
DEVICE DELETE
DVC PRIORITY
TRANSFER PB*
“NO MEMORY” appears if there is no contacts stored.
Delete a contact
Not applicable for mobile phone that supports PBAP.
1 Press to enter Bluetooth mode.
2 Turn the volume knob to select [CALL HISTORY] or [PHONE BOOK], then
press the knob.
3 Turn the volume knob to select a contact.
If a contact is selected, press the volume knob to show the phone
number.
4 Press and hold the volume knob to enter delete mode.
5 Turn the volume knob to select [DELETE ONE] or [DELETE ALL], then
press the knob.
DELETE ONE: Selected name or phone number in step 3 is deleted.
DELETE ALL: All names or phone numbers from the selected menu in
step 2 is deleted.
6 Turn the volume knob to select [YES] or [NO], then press the knob.
PIN CODE EDIT
(0000)
RECONNECT
AUTO PAIRING
BT HF/AUDIO
INITIALIZE
.
Default: XX
Selects the phone or audio device to connect or disconnect.
1 Turn the volume knob to select a device to delete, then press the knob.
2 Turn the volume knob to select [YES] or [NO], then press the knob.
Selects a device to be connected as priority device.
“ ” appears in front of the device name set as priority.
“DL PB
” appears and transfer the phonebook of the connected
phone to this unit manually.
* Selectable only when the connected phone supports OPP.
Changes the PIN code (up to 6 digits).
1 Turn the volume knob to select a number.
2 Press S / T to move the entry position.
Repeat steps 1 and 2 until you finish entering the PIN code.
3 Press the volume knob to confirm.
ON: The unit automatically reconnect when the Bluetooth device is within
range. ; OFF: Cancels.
ON: The unit automatically pair supported Bluetooth device (iPhone/iPod
touch) when it is connected through USB input terminal. Depending on
the iOS version of the connected iPhone/iPod touch, this function may not
work. ; OFF: Cancels.
FRONT: Ouputs audio from the front left and right speakers. ;
ALL: Outputs audio from all the speakers.
YES: Initializes all the Bluetooth settings (including stored pairing,
phonebook, and etc.). ; NO: Cancels.
ENGLISH |
JS_KWD_KMM_X50BT_MN_f_EN.indd 13
Data Size:
Book Size:
B6L (182 mm x 128 mm)
B6L (182 mm x 128 mm)
13
23/12/2013 4:30:50 PM
BLUETOOTH®
DISPLAY SETTINGS
Internet radio via Bluetooth
1 Press the volume knob to enter [FUNCTION].
2 Turn the volume knob to select [DISPLAY], then
Listen to Pandora
press the knob.
Preparation:
Select [ON] for [PANDORA SRC]. ( 4)
You can listen to Pandora on your smart phone (Android OS) through Bluetooth on this unit.
1 Open the Pandora application on your device.
2 Connect to Bluetooth audio player. ( 9)
3 Press B SRC to select PANDORA.
The source switches and broadcast starts automatically.
• You can operate Pandora in the same way as Pandora for iPod/iPhone. ( 9)
3 Turn the volume knob to make a selection (see
the following table), then press the knob.
Repeat step 3 until the desired item is selected or
activated.
4 Press and hold
to exit.
To return to the previous setting item or hierarchy,
press
.
Default: XX
COLOR SELECT
Bluetooth audio player
Operations and display indications may differ according to their availability on the
connected device.
To
Playback
Do this
1 Press B SRC (or press SRC on RC-406) to select BT AUDIO.
2 Operate the Bluetooth audio player to start playback.
Pause or resume
playback
Press 6 IW (or press ENT IW on RC-406).
Select group or folder
Press
Reverse/forward skip
Press S / T (or press S / T (+) on RC-406).
Reverse/fast-forward
Press and hold S / T (or press and hold S / T (+) on
RC-406).
Repeat play
Press 4 repeatedly to make a selection.
ALL REPEAT, FILE REPEAT, REPEAT OFF
Random play
Press 3 repeatedly to make a selection.
FOLDER RANDOM, RANDOM OFF
Press and hold 3 to select “ALL RANDOM.”
/
(or press *AM– / #FM+ on RC-406).
DIMMER
BRIGHTNESS
TEXT SCROLL
VARIABLE SCAN/ COLOR 01 — COLOR 24/
USER: Selects your preferred button illumination
color.
You can create your own color (when
[COLOR 01] — [COLOR 24] or [USER] is
selected). The color you have created can be
selected when you select [USER].
1 Press and hold the volume knob to enter the
detailed color adjustment.
2 Press S / T to select the color
(R/ G/ B) to adjust.
3 Turn the volume knob to adjust the level
(0 — 9), then press the knob.
ON: Dims the display and button illumination. ;
OFF: Illuminates according to the
[BRIGHTNESS] settings.
LVL 0 — LVL 31: Selects your preferred
brightness level for display and button
illumination.
AUTO/ ONCE: Selects whether to scroll the
display information automatically, or scroll only
once. ; OFF: Cancels.
14
JS_KWD_KMM_X50BT_MN_03_EN.indd 14
Data Size:
Book Size:
B6L (182 mm x 128 mm)
B6L (182 mm x 128 mm)
5/12/2013 10:14:31 AM
AUDIO SETTINGS
While listening to any source...
1 Press the volume knob to enter [FUNCTION].
2 Turn the volume knob to select [AUDIO CONTROL], then press the knob.
3 Turn the volume knob to make a selection (see the following table),
then press the knob.
Repeat step 3 until the desired item is selected or activated.
4 Press and hold
to exit.
(or using RC-406)
1 Press AUD to enter [AUDIO CONTROL].
2 Press J / K to make a selection, then press ENT IW.
PRESET EQ
DRIVE EQ/ TOP40/ POWERFUL/ ROCK/ POPS/ EASY/ JAZZ/
NATURAL/ USER: Selects a preset equalizer suitable to the music
genre. (Select [USER] to use the customized bass, middle, and treble
settings.)
[DRIVE EQ] is a preset equalizer that reduces noise from the road.
BASS BOOST
LV1/ LV2/ LV3: Selects your preferred bass boost level. ; OFF: Cancels.
LOUDNESS
LV1/ LV2: Selects your preferred low and high frequencies boost to
produce a well-balanced sound at a low volume level. ; OFF: Cancels.
SUBWOOFER SET
ON: Turns on the subwoofer output. ; OFF: Cancels.
LPF SUBWOOFER
THROUGH: All signals are sent to the subwoofer. ; 85HZ/ 120HZ/
160HZ: Audio signals with frequencies lower than 85 Hz/ 120 Hz/
160 Hz are sent to the subwoofer.
Adjusts the subwoofer output level.
SUB-W PHASE
Adjusts the level to memorize for each source. (Before
making an adjustment, select the source you want to
adjust.)
REVERSE (180°)/ NORMAL (0°): Selects the phase of the subwoofer
output to be in line with the speaker output for optimum performance.
(Selectable only if a setting other than [THROUGH] is selected for
[LPF SUBWOOFER].)
HPF
THROUGH: All signals are sent to the speakers. ; 100HZ/ 120HZ/
150HZ: Audio signals with frequencies higher than 100 Hz/ 120 Hz/
150 Hz are sent to the speakers.
To return to the previous setting item or hierarchy, press
.
Default: XX
SUB-W LEVEL
–15 to +15 (0)
BASS LEVEL
–8 to +8 (+6)
MID LEVEL
–8 to +8 (+5)
TRE LEVEL
–8 to +8 (0)
EQ PRO
BASS ADJUST BASS CTR FRQ
MID ADJUST
TRE ADJUST
60/ 80/ 100/ 200: Selects the center frequency.
FADER
R15 to F15 (0): Adjusts the rear and front speaker output balance.
BASS LEVEL
–8 to +8 (+6): Adjusts the level.
BALANCE
L15 to R15 (0): Adjusts the left and right speaker output balance.
BASS Q FACTOR
1.00/ 1.25/ 1.50/ 2.00: Adjusts the quality factor.
BASS EXTEND
ON: Turns on the extended bass. ; OFF: Cancels.
VOLUME OFFSET
(Default: 0)
MID CTR FRQ
0.5/ 1.0/ 1.5/ 2.5K: Selects the center frequency.
–8 to +8 (for AUX) ; –8 to 0 (for other sources): Presets the volume
adjustment level of each source. (Before adjustment, select the source
you want to adjust.)
MID LEVEL
–8 to +8 (+5): Adjusts the level.
MID Q FACTOR
0.75/ 1.00/ 1.25: Adjusts the quality factor.
SOUND RECNSTR
(Sound
reconstruction)
ON: Creates realistic sound by compensating the high-frequency
components and restoring the rise-time of the waveform that are lost
in audio data compression. ; OFF: Cancels.
TRE CTR FRQ
10.0/ 12.5/ 15.0/ 17.5K: Selects the center frequency.
TRE LEVEL
–8 to +8 (0): Adjusts the level.
• [SUB-W LEVEL]/ [SUBWOOFER SET]/ [LPF SUBWOOFER]/ [SUB-W PHASE] is
selectable only if [SWITCH PREOUT] is set to [SUB-W]. ( 4)
• [SUB-W LEVEL]/ [LPF SUBWOOFER]/ [SUB-W PHASE] is selectable only if
[SUBWOOFER SET] is set to [ON].
ENGLISH |
JS_KWD_KMM_X50BT_MN_03_EN.indd 15
Data Size:
Book Size:
B6L (182 mm x 128 mm)
B6L (182 mm x 128 mm)
15
5/12/2013 10:14:31 AM
MORE INFORMATION
TROUBLESHOOTING
General
About iPod/iPhone
Detailed information and notes about the playable
audio files are stated in an online manual on the
following web site:
www.kenwood.com/cs/ce/audiofile/
Made for
- iPod touch (1st, 2nd, 3rd, 4th, and 5th generation)
- iPod classic
- iPod nano (3rd, 4th, 5th, 6th, and 7th generation)
- iPhone, iPhone 3G, 3GS, 4, 4S, 5
• For the latest compatible list and software versions of
iPhone/iPod, see: www.kenwood.com/cs/ce/ipod
• You cannot operate iPod if “KENWOOD” or “ ” is
displayed on iPod.
Playable files
• Playable audio file: MP3 (.mp3), WMA (.wma),
WAV (.wav), FLAC (.flac)
• Playable USB device file system: FAT12, FAT16, FAT32
Even when audio files comply with the standards listed
above, playback may be impossible depending on the
types or conditions of media or device.
About USB devices
• This unit can play MP3/WMA/WAV/FLAC files stored
on a USB mass storage class device.
• You cannot connect a USB device via a USB hub.
• Connecting a cable whose total length is longer than
5 m may result in abnormal playback.
• This unit cannot recognize a USB device whose rating
is other than 5 V and exceeds 1 A.
About KENWOOD Music Editor Light
and KENWOOD Music Control
• This unit supports the PC application KENWOOD Music
Editor Light and Android™ application KENWOOD
Music Control.
• When you play audio files with song data added using
the KENWOOD Music Editor Light or KENWOOD Music
Control, you can search for audio files by Genres,
Artists, Albums, Playlists, and Songs.
• KENWOOD Music Editor Light and KENWOOD Music
Control are available on the following web site:
www.kenwood.com/cs/ce/
About Pandora
• Pandora is available only in the U.S., Australia and
New Zealand.
• Because Pandora is a third-party service, the
specifications are subject to change without prior
notice. Accordingly, compatibility may be impaired, or
some or all of the services may become unavailable.
• Some functions of Pandora cannot be operated from
this unit.
• For issues using the application, please contact
Pandora at pandora-support@pandora.com.
Symptom
Sound cannot be heard.
“PROTECT” appears and
no operations can be
done.
• Sound cannot be heard.
• The unit does not turn
on.
• Information shown on
the display is incorrect.
The unit does not work
at all.
• Radio reception is poor.
• Static noise while
listening to the radio.
“NA FILE” appears.
Remedy
• Adjust the volume to the optimum level.
• Check the cords and connections.
Check to be sure the terminals of the
speaker wires are insulated properly,
then reset the unit. If this does not
solve the problem, consult your nearest
service center.
Clean the connectors. ( 2)
Reset the unit. ( 3)
• Connect the antenna firmly.
• Pull the antenna out all the way.
Make sure the media contains supported
audio files. ( MORE INFORMATION)
Copy the files and folders onto the USB
device again. If this does not solve the
problem, reset the USB device or use
another USB device.
Connect a USB device, and change the
source to USB again.
About Bluetooth
• Depending on the Bluetooth version of the device,
some Bluetooth devices may not be able to connect to
this unit.
• This unit may not work with some Bluetooth devices.
• Signal conditions vary, depending on the
surroundings.
• For more information about Bluetooth, visit the
following website: www.kenwood.com/cs/ce/
“READ ERROR” appears.
“NO DEVICE” appears.
“COPY PRO” appears.
“NA DEVICE” appears.
“NO MUSIC” appears.
A copy-protected file is played.
Connect a supported USB device, and
check the connections.
Connect a USB device that contains
playable audio files.
16
JS_KWD_KMM_X50BT_MN_03_EN.indd 16
Data Size:
Book Size:
B6L (182 mm x 128 mm)
B6L (182 mm x 128 mm)
5/12/2013 10:14:31 AM
TROUBLESHOOTING
Symptom
Remedy
Bluetooth®
No Bluetooth
device is detected.
• Search from the Bluetooth device again.
• Reset the unit. ( 3)
Pairing cannot be
made.
• Make sure you have entered the same PIN code to both the unit
and Bluetooth device.
• Delete pairing information from both the unit and the
Bluetooth device, then perform pairing again. ( 10)
The number of registered devices has reached its limit. Retry
after deleting an unnecessary device. ( 13, DEVICE DELETE)
“DEVICE FULL”
appears.
Remedy
Echo or noise occurs.
“NO INFO” appears.
• Adjust the microphone unit’s position. ( 9)
• Check the [ECHO CANCEL] setting. ( 11)
• Reduce the distance between the unit and the Bluetooth
device.
• Move the car to a place where you can get a better signal
reception.
• Use voice calling method in a more quiet environment.
• Reduce the distance from the microphone when you
speak the name.
• Make sure the same voice as the registered voice tag is
used.
The connected phone does not support Voice Recognition
feature.
There is no registered device connected/found via
Bluetooth.
Try the operation again. If “ERROR” appears again, check
if the device supports the function you have tried.
Bluetooth device cannot get the contact information.
Sound is being
interrupted or skipped
during playback of
a Bluetooth audio
player.
• Reduce the distance between the unit and the Bluetooth
audio player.
• Turn off, then turn on the unit and try to connect again.
• Other Bluetooth devices might be trying to connect to the
unit.
The connected
Bluetooth audio
player cannot be
controlled.
• Check whether the connected Bluetooth audio player
supports Audio/Video Remote Control Profile (AVRCP).
(Refer to the instructions of your audio player.)
• Disconnect and connect the Bluetooth player again.
Phone sound quality
is poor.
• Voice calling method
is not successful.
• “N/A VOICE TAG”
appears.
Bluetooth®
Pandora
• Reconnect the iPod.
• Reset the iPod.
“READING” keeps flashing.
Do not use too many hierarchical levels or folders.
Elapsed playing time is not
This is caused by how the tracks are recorded.
correct.
This unit can only display uppercase letters, numbers, and a
Correct characters are not
limited number of symbols.
displayed (e.g. album
name).
“ADD ERROR”
New station creation is unsuccessful.
“SEARCH ERROR”
“CHECK DEVICE”
Check the Pandora application on your device.
“NO SKIPS”
The skip limit has been reached.
“NO STATIONS”
No stations are found.
“STATION LIMIT”
The number of registered stations has reached its limit. Retry
after deleting unnecessary stations from your device.
“UPGRADE APP”
Make sure you have installed the latest version of the Pandora
application on your device.
“CONNECT ERROR”
Communication is unstable.
“RATING ERROR”
Registration of thumbs up/thumbs down has failed.
“LICENSE ERROR”
You try to access from a country which Pandora is not
deliverable.
Symptom
“iPod ERROR” appears.
“NOT SUPPORT”
appears.
• “NO ENTRY” appears.
• “NO PAIR” appears.
“ERROR” appears.
• “HF ERROR XX”
appears.
• “BT ERROR” appears.
Reset the unit and try the operation again. If this does not
solve the problem, consult your nearest service center.
ENGLISH |
JS_KWD_KMM_X50BT_MN_f_EN.indd 17
Data Size:
Book Size:
B6L (182 mm x 128 mm)
B6L (182 mm x 128 mm)
17
10/12/2013 4:38:51 PM
INSTALLATION / CONNECTION
Warning
• The unit can only be used with a 12 V DC power supply, negative
ground.
• Disconnect the battery’s negative terminal before wiring and
mounting.
• Do not connect Battery wire (yellow) and Ignition wire (red) to the
car chassis or Ground wire (black) to prevent a short circuit.
• Insulate unconnected wires with vinyl tape to prevent a short circuit.
• Be sure to ground this unit to the car’s chassis again after
installation.
Installing the unit (in-dash mounting)
Do the required wiring.
( 19)
Hook on the top side
Caution
• For safety’s sake, leave wiring and mounting to professionals.
Consult the car audio dealer.
• Install this unit in the console of your vehicle. Do not touch the metal
parts of this unit during and shortly after use of the unit. Metal parts
such as the heat sink and enclosure become hot.
• Do not connect the [ wires of speakers to the car chassis or Ground
wire (black), or connect them in parallel.
• Mount the unit at an angle of less than 30º.
• If your vehicle wiring harness does not have the ignition terminal,
connect Ignition wire (red) to the terminal on the vehicle’s fuse box
which provides 12 V DC power supply and is turned on and off by the
ignition key.
• After the unit is installed, check whether the brake lamps, blinkers,
wipers, etc. on the car are working properly.
• If the fuse blows, first make sure the wires are not touching car’s
chassis, then replace the old fuse with one that has the same rating.
Basic procedure
1 Remove the key from the ignition switch, then
2
3
4
5
disconnect the [ terminal of the car battery.
Connect the wires properly.
See Wiring connection. ( 19)
Install the unit to your car.
See Installing the unit (in-dash mounting).
Connect the [ terminal of the car battery.
Reset the unit. ( 3)
Orientate the trim plate as
illustrated before fitting.
Dashboard of
your car
Bend the appropriate tabs to hold the
mounting sleeve firmly in place.
When installing without the mounting sleeve
1 Remove the mounting sleeve and trim plate from
the unit.
2 Align the holes in the unit (on both sides) with the
vehicle mounting bracket and secure the unit with
screws (commercially available).
Use only the specified screws. Using wrong screws might damage the unit.
How to remove the unit
1 Detach the faceplate.
2 Fit the catch pin on the extraction keys
into the holes on both sides of the trim
plate, then pull it out.
3 Insert the extraction keys deeply into the
slots on each side, then follow the arrows
as shown on the right.
18
JS_KWD_KMM_X50BT_MN_03_EN.indd 18
Data Size:
Book Size:
B6L (182 mm x 128 mm)
B6L (182 mm x 128 mm)
5/12/2013 10:14:31 AM
Wiring connection
Part list for installation
Fuse (10 A)
(A) Faceplate
Front output, Rear/subwoofer output
USB cable
Antenna terminal
Microphone
input jack
( 9)
(B) Trim plate
If no connections are made, do not let the wire
come out from the tab.
White
To front speaker (left)
White/Black
To front speaker (right)
Gray/Black
To rear speaker (left)
Green/Black
Gray
Green
Light blue/yellow
(Steering remote
control wire)
Blue/White
(Power control wire)
To the steering wheel remote control
adapter
(C) Mounting sleeve
To the power control terminal when using
the optional power amplifier, or to the
antenna control terminal in the vehicle.
Purple
To rear speaker (right)
(D) Wiring harness
Purple/Black
Ignition switch
Car fuse box
Red
Brown
(Ignition wire)
(Mute control wire)
To connect the Kenwood navigation system,
refer your navigations manual.
(E) Extraction key
Yellow
Car fuse box
(Battery wire)
Black (Ground wire)
Battery
To the metallic body or chassis
of the car
ENGLISH |
JS_KWD_KMM_X50BT_MN_f_EN.indd 19
Data Size:
Book Size:
B6L (182 mm x 128 mm)
B6L (182 mm x 128 mm)
19
17/12/2013 2:42:45 PM
SPECIFICATIONS
Band 1
USB
Band 2/ 3
Usable Sensitivity MW
(S/N = 20 dB)
SW
USB Standard File System
Maximum Supply Current
Frequency Response (±1 dB)
Signal-to-Noise Ratio (1 kHz)
Dynamic Range
Channel Separation
MP3 Decode
WMA Decode
USB
Bluetooth Ver.2.1+EDR Certified
2.402 GHz — 2.480 GHz
+4 dBm (MAX), 0 dBm (AVE) Power Class 2
Line of sight approx. 10 m
HFP (Hands-Free Profile)/ SPP (Serial Port
Profile)/ PBAP (Phonebook Access Profile)/
OPP (Object Push Profile)/ A2DP (Advanced
Audio Distribution Profile)/ AVRCP (Audio/
Video Remote Control Profile) Ver. 1.3
Maximum Output Power
Full Bandwidth Power
Speaker Impedance
Tone Action
Preout Level/Load (USB)
Preout Impedance
50 W × 4
22 W × 4 (at less than 1 % THD)
4 Ω — 8 Ω
Bass
200 Hz ±8 dB
Middle
2.5 kHz ±8 dB
Treble
12.5 kHz ±8 dB
2 500 mV/10 kΩ
≤ 600 Ω
Frequency Response (±3 dB)
Input Maximum Voltage
Input Impedance
20 Hz — 20 kHz
1 200 mV
30 kΩ
Operating Voltage
Maximum Current Consumption
Operational Temperature Range
Installation Size (W × H × D)
Weight
14.4 V (10.5 V — 16 V allowable)
10 A
0°C — +40°C
182 mm × 53 mm × 107 mm
0.54 kg
30 Hz — 15 kHz
64 dB
40 dB
531 kHz to 1 611 kHz (9 kHz space)
530 kHz to 1 700 kHz (10 kHz space)
2 940 kHz to 7 735 kHz (5 kHz space)
9 500 kHz to 10 135 kHz/
11 580 kHz to 18 135 kHz (5 kHz space)
9 kHz/10 kHz
5 kHz
29.0 dBμ (28.2 μV)
30 dBμ (32 μV)
USB 1.1, USB 2.0 (Full speed)
FAT12/ 16/ 32
DC 5 V 1 A
20 Hz — 20 kHz
105 dB
88 dB
90 dB
Compliant with MPEG-1/2 Audio Layer-3
Compliant with Windows Media Audio
RIFF waveform Audio Format
(Linear PCM only)
FLAC files
Version
Frequency Range
Output Power
Maximum Communication Range
Profile
Bluetooth
Channel Space
Selection
WAV Decode
FLAC Decode
Audio
Channel Space Selection
Usable Sensitivity (S/N = 26 dB)
Quieting Sensitivity
(DIN S/N = 46 dB)
Frequency Response (±3 dB)
Signal-to-Noise Ratio (MONO)
Stereo Separation (1 kHz)
MW/ Frequency Range Band 1 (MW)
SW1/
SW2
Band 2 (SW1)
Band 3 (SW2)
87.5 MHz — 108.0 MHz (50 kHz space)
87.9 MHz — 107.9 MHz (200 kHz space)
50 kHz/ 200 kHz
8.2 dBf (0.71 μV/75 Ω)
17.2 dBf (2.0 μV/75 Ω)
Auxiliary
Frequency Range
General
Tuner
FM
Subject to change without notice.
20
JS_KWD_KMM_X50BT_MN_f_EN.indd 20
Data Size:
Book Size:
B6L (182 mm x 128 mm)
B6L (182 mm x 128 mm)
23/12/2013 12:14:42 PM
For Turkey
libFLAC
Bu ürün 28300 sayılı Resmi Gazete’de yayımlanan Atik Elektrikli ve Elektronik Eşyalarin Kontrolü
Yönetmeliğe uygun olarak üretilmiştir.
Copyright (C) 2000,2001,2002,2003,2004,2005,2006,2007,2008,2009 Josh Coalson
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted
provided that the following conditions are met:
- Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and
the following disclaimer.
- Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions
and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the
distribution.
- Neither the name of the Xiph.org Foundation nor the names of its contributors may be used
to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written
permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND ONTRIBUTORS “AS IS” AND ANY
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL
THE FOUNDATION OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL,
EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF
SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY,
OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS
SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
Eski Elektrik ve Elektronik Ekipmanların İmha Edilmesi Hakkında Bilgi (ayrı atık
toplama sistemlerini kullanan ülkeleri için uygulanabilir)
Sembollü (üzerinde çarpı işareti olan çöp kutusu) ürünler ev atıkları olarak
atılamaz.
Eski elektrik ve elektronik ekipmanlar, bu ürünleri ve ürün atıklarını geri
dönüştürebilecek bir tesiste değerlendirilmelidir. Yaşadığınız bölgeye en
yakın geri dönüşüm tesisinin yerini öğrenmek için yerel makamlara müracaat
edin. Uygun geri dönüşüm ve atık imha yöntemi sağlığımız ve çevremiz
üzerindeki zararlı etkileri önlerken kaynakların korunmasına da yardımcı
olacaktır.
• “Made for iPod,” and “Made for iPhone” mean that an electronic accessory has been designed to
connect specifically to iPod, or iPhone, respectively, and has been certified by the developer to
meet Apple performance standards. Apple is not responsible for the operation of this device or
its compliance with safety and regulatory standards. Please note that the use of this accessory
with iPod or iPhone may affect wireless performance.
• iPhone, iPod, iPod classic, iPod nano, and iPod touch are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in
the U.S. and other countries.
• Lightning is a trademark of Apple Inc.
• Pandora, the Pandora logo, and the Pandora trade dress are trademarks or registered
trademarks of Pandora Media, Inc., used with permission.
• Android is trademark of Google Inc.
• The Bluetooth® word mark and logos are registered trademarks owned by Bluetooth
SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks by JVC KENWOOD Corporation is under license. Other
trademarks and trade names are those of their respective owners.
21
JS_KWD_KMM_X50BT_MN_f_EN.indd 21
Data Size:
Book Size:
B6L (182 mm x 128 mm)
B6L (182 mm x 128 mm)
23/12/2013 12:35:15 PM
libFLAC
Copyright (C) 2000,2001,2002,2003,2004,2005,2006,2007,2008,2009 Josh Coalson
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted
provided that the following conditions are met:
- Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions
and the following disclaimer.
- Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of
conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided
with the distribution.
- Neither the name of the Xiph.org Foundation nor the names of its contributors may be used
to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written
permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND ONTRIBUTORS “AS IS” AND ANY
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES
OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT
SHALL THE FOUNDATION OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,
SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES‫ ؛‬LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS‫ ؛‬OR BUSINESS
INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT,
STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF
THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
For Turkey
Bu ürün 28300 sayılı Resmi Gazete’de yayımlanan Atik Elektrikli ve Elektronik Eşyalarin Kontrolü
Yönetmeliğe uygun olarak üretilmiştir.
Eski Elektrik ve Elektronik Ekipmanların İmha Edilmesi Hakkında Bilgi (ayrı atık
toplama sistemlerini kullanan ülkeleri için uygulanabilir)
Sembollü (üzerinde çarpı işareti olan çöp kutusu) ürünler ev atıkları olarak
atılamaz.
Eski elektrik ve elektronik ekipmanlar, bu ürünleri ve ürün atıklarını geri
dönüştürebilecek bir tesiste değerlendirilmelidir. Yaşadığınız bölgeye
en yakın geri dönüşüm tesisinin yerini öğrenmek için yerel makamlara
müracaat edin. Uygun geri dönüşüm ve atık imha yöntemi sağlığımız ve
çevremiz üzerindeki zararlı etkileri önlerken kaynakların korunmasına da
yardımcı olacaktır.
• “Made for iPod,” and “Made for iPhone” mean that an electronic accessory has been designed
to connect specifically to iPod, or iPhone, respectively, and has been certified by the developer
to meet Apple performance standards. Apple is not responsible for the operation of this
device or its compliance with safety and regulatory standards. Please note that the use of this
accessory with iPod or iPhone may affect wireless performance.
• iPhone, iPod, iPod classic, iPod nano, and iPod touch are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered
in the U.S. and other countries.
• Lightning is a trademark of Apple Inc.
• Pandora, the Pandora logo, and the Pandora trade dress are trademarks or registered
trademarks of Pandora Media, Inc., used with permission.
• Android is trademark of Google Inc.
• The Bluetooth® word mark and logos are registered trademarks owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc.
and any use of such marks by JVC KENWOOD Corporation is under license. Other trademarks
and trade names are those of their respective owners.
٢١
JS_KWD_KMM_X50BT_MN_AR_03.indd 21
23/12/2013 3:05:12 PM
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﻟﻒ‬
‫‪USB‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺳﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﺔ ‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﺔ ‪٣ /٢‬‬
‫‪MW‬‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ )‪SW = S/N‬‬
‫‪ ٢٠‬ﺩﻳﺴﻴﺒﻞ(‬
‫‪٢٠‬‬
‫‪) USB 2.0 ،USB 1.1‬ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﻗﺼﻮﻯ(‬
‫ﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭ ‪USB‬‬
‫‪32 /16 /FAT12‬‬
‫ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ١‬ﺃﻣﺒﻴﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻺﻣﺪﺍﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺗﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ ‪ ٥‬ﻓﻮﻟﺖ‬
‫‪ ٢٠‬ﻫﻴﺮﺗﺰ — ‪ ٢٠‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﻫﺮﺗﺰ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺠﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ )‪ ١±‬ﺩﻳﺴﻴﺒﻞ(‬
‫ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺿﺎﺀ )‪ ١‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﻫﺮﺗﺰ( ‪ ١٠٥‬ﺩﻳﺴﻴﺒﻞ‬
‫‪ ٨٨‬ﺩﻳﺴﻴﺒﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ‬
‫‪ ٩٠‬ﺩﻳﺴﻴﺒﻞ‬
‫ﻓﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ‬
‫ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ‪MPEG-1/2 Audio Layer-3‬‬
‫ﻓﻚ ﺷﻔﺮﺓ ‪MP3‬‬
‫ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ‪Windows Media Audio‬‬
‫ﻓﻚ ﺷﻔﺮﺓ ‪WMA‬‬
‫‪23/12/2013 3:05:13 PM‬‬
‫ﻋﺎﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﺔ ‪(SW2) ٣‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﺔ ‪(SW1) ٢‬‬
‫ﺻﻮﺕ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺳﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ )‪ ٢٦ = S/N‬ﺩﻳﺴﻴﺒﻞ(‬
‫ﺗﻬﺪﺋﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ )‪ ٤٦ = DIN S/N‬ﺩﻳﺴﻴﺒﻞ(‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺠﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ )‪ ٣±‬ﺩﻳﺴﻴﺒﻞ(‬
‫ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺿﺎﺀ )ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ(‬
‫ﻓﺼﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺮﻳﻮ )‪ ١‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﻫﺮﺗﺰ(‬
‫‪ MW/‬ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﺔ ‪(MW) ١‬‬
‫‪SW1/‬‬
‫‪SW2‬‬
‫‪Bluetooth‬‬
‫ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ‬
‫‪ ٨٧٫٥‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎ ﻫﺮﺗﺰ — ‪ ١٠٨٫٠‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎ ﻫﺮﺗﺰ )ﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ ‪ ٥٠‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﻫﺮﺗﺰ(‬
‫‪ ٨٧٫٩‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎ ﻫﺮﺗﺰ — ‪ ١٠٧٫٩‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎ ﻫﺮﺗﺰ )ﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ ‪ ٢٠٠‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﻫﺮﺗﺰ(‬
‫‪ ٥٠‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﻫﺮﺗﺰ‪ ٢٠٠/‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﻫﺮﺗﺰ‬
‫‪ ٨٫٢‬ﺩﻳﺴﻴﺒﻞ )‪ ٠,٧١‬ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻭ ﻓﻮﻟﺖ‪ ٧٥ /‬ﺍﻭﻡ(‬
‫‪ ٢٫٠) dBf ١٧٫٢‬ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻭ ﻓﻮﻟﺖ‪ ٧٥ /‬ﺍﻭﻡ(‬
‫‪ ٣٠‬ﻫﻴﺮﺗﺰ — ‪ ١٥‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﻫﺮﺗﺰ‬
‫‪ ٦٤‬ﺩﻳﺴﻴﺒﻞ‬
‫‪ ٤٠‬ﺩﻳﺴﻴﺒﻞ‬
‫‪ ٥٣١‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﻫﺮﺗﺰ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ١ ٦١١‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﻫﺮﺗﺰ‬
‫)ﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ ‪ ٩‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﻫﺮﺗﺰ(‬
‫‪ ٥٣٠‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﻫﺮﺗﺰ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ١ ٧٠٠‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﻫﺮﺗﺰ‬
‫)ﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ ‪ ١٠‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﻫﺮﺗﺰ(‬
‫‪ ٢ ٩٤٠‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﻫﺮﺗﺰ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٧ ٧٣٥‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﻫﺮﺗﺰ‬
‫)ﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ ‪ ٥‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﻫﺮﺗﺰ(‬
‫‪ ٩ ٥٠٠‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﻫﺮﺗﺰ ﺍﻟﻰ ‪ ١٠ ١٣٥‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﻫﺮﺗﺰ‬
‫‪ ١١ ٥٨٠‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﻫﺮﺗﺰ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ١٨ ١٣٥‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﻫﺮﺗﺰ‬
‫)ﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ ‪ ٥‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﻫﺮﺗﺰ(‬
‫‪ ٩‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﻫﺮﺗﺰ‪ ١٠/‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﻫﺮﺗﺰ‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﻫﺮﺗﺰ‬
‫‪ ٢٩٫٠‬ﺩﻳﺴﻴﺒﻞ ﻣﻴﻮ )‪ ٢٨٫٢‬ﻣﻴﻮ ﻓﻮﻟﺖ(‬
‫‪ ٣٠‬ﺩﻳﺴﻴﺒﻞ ﻣﻴﻮ )‪ ٣٢‬ﻣﻴﻮ ﻓﻮﻟﺖ(‬
‫‪USB‬‬
‫‪FM‬‬
‫ﻳﺨﻀﻊ ﻟﻠﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺇﺧﻄﺎﺭ ﻣﺴﺒﻖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻚ ﺷﻔﺮﺓ ‪WAV‬‬
‫ﻓﻚ ﺷﻔﺮﺓ ‪FLAC‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺻﻮﺕ ‪ PCM) waveform RIFF‬ﺧﻄﻲ ﻓﻘﻂ(‬
‫ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ‪FLAC‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍﺭ‬
‫ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ‬
‫ﻗﺪﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﺝ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍﺭ ‪ ٢٫١‬ﻣﻦ ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ ‪ + Bluetooth‬ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ ‪EDR Certified‬‬
‫‪ ٢٫٤٠٢‬ﺟﻴﺠﺎﻫﻴﺮﺗﺰ — ‪ ٢٫٤٨٠‬ﺟﻴﺠﺎﻫﺮﺗﺰ‬
‫‪ ٤+‬ﺩﻳﺴﻴﺒﻞ ﻣﻠﻠﻲ ﻭﺍﺕ )ﻛﺤﺪ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ(‪ ٠ ،‬ﺩﻳﺴﻴﺒﻞ‬
‫ﻣﻠﻠﻲ ﻭﺍﺕ )ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ( ﻟﻔﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪٢‬‬
‫ﺧﻂ ﺍﻟﺮﺅﻳﺔ ‪ ١٠‬ﺃﻣﺘﺎﺭ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﹰﺎ‬
‫‪) HFP‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻳﻦ(‪) SPP /‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻔﺬ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻠﺴﻠﻲ(‪) PBAP /‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ(‪OPP /‬‬
‫)ﻭﺿﻊ ﺩﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺋﻦ(‪) A2DP /‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ(‪/‬‬
‫‪) AVRCP‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ( ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ‪٣٫١‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬
‫‪ ٥٠‬ﻭﺍﻁ ‪٤ x‬‬
‫ﻗﺪﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﻘﺼﻮﻯ‬
‫ﻗﺪﺭﺓ ﺳﻌﺔ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺒﺚ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ‪ ٢٢‬ﻭﺍﺕ ‪) ٤ x‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺃﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٪ ١‬ﺇﺟﻤﺎﻟﻲ ﺗﺸﺘﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ(‬
‫ﻣﻦ ‪ ٤‬ﺃﻭﻡ — ‪ ٨‬ﺃﻭﻡ‬
‫ﻣﻌﺎﻭﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ‬
‫‪ ٢٠٠‬ﻫﻴﺮﺗﺰ ‪ ٨ ±‬ﺩﻳﺴﻴﺒﻞ‬
‫‪ ٢,٥‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮﻫﺮﺗﺰ ‪ ٨ ±‬ﺩﻳﺴﻴﺒﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺳﻄﻴﺔ‬
‫‪ ١٢٫٥‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮﻫﺮﺗﺰ ‪ ٨ ±‬ﺩﻳﺴﻴﺒﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺪﺓ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﺝ ﺍﻻﺑﺘﺪﺍﺋﻲ ‪ /‬ﺍﻟﺤﻤﻞ )‪ ٢ ٥٠٠ (USB‬ﻣﻠﻠﻲ ﻓﻮﻟﺖ‪ ١٠/‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﺃﻭﻡ‬
‫ﻣﻌﺎﻭﻗﺔ ﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻻﺑﺘﺪﺍﺋﻲ ≥ ‪ ٦٠٠‬ﺍﻭﻡ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺠﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ )‪ ٣±‬ﺩﻳﺴﻴﺒﻞ(‬
‫‪ ٢٠‬ﻫﻴﺮﺗﺰ — ‪ ٢٠‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﻫﺮﺗﺰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻠﺪﺧﻞ‬
‫‪ ١ ٢٠٠‬ﻣﻠﻠﻲ ﻓﻮﻟﺖ‬
‫ﻣﻌﺎﻭﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻞ‬
‫‪ ٣٠‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﺃﻭﻡ‬
‫‪ ١٤,٤‬ﻓﻮﻟﺖ )ﻣﺴﻤﻮﺡ ‪ ١٠,٥‬ﻓﻮﻟﺖ — ‪ ١٦‬ﻓﻮﻟﺖ(‬
‫ﻓﻮﻟﻄﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪ ١٠‬ﺃﻣﺒﻴﺮ‬
‫ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﺍﺳﺘﻬﻼﻙ ﻟﻠﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫‪ ٠‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺳﻠﺰﻳﻮﺱ — ‪ ٤٠+‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺳﻠﺰﻳﻮﺱ‬
‫ﻣﺪﻯ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ )ﻋﺮﺽ ‪ x‬ﻃﻮﻝ ‪ x‬ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ( ‪ ١٨٢‬ﻣﻢ ‪ ٥٣ x‬ﻣﻢ ‪ ١٠٧ x‬ﻣﻢ‬
‫‪ ٠٫٥٤‬ﻛﺠﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺯﻥ‬
‫‪JS_KWD_KMM_X50BT_MN_AR_03.indd 20‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﻼﻙ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﺮﺝ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺨﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ‪/‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﺒﻮﻭﻓﺮ‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪USB‬‬
‫ﺻﻤﺎﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ‬
‫)‪ ١٠‬ﺃﻣﺒﻴﺮ(‬
‫ﻃﺮﻑ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺋﻲ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻀﺨﻢ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻱ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺑﻄﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺋﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﺴﻴﺎﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻼﺣﺔ ﻣﻦ ‪،Kenwood‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻼﺣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺑﻴﺾ‬
‫ﺃﺯﺭﻕ ﻓﺎﺗﺢ‪/‬ﺃﺻﻔﺮ‬
‫)ﺳﻠﻚ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬
‫ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺠﻠﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺩﺓ(‬
‫ﺭﻣﺎﺩﻳﺔ‪/‬ﺳﻮﺩﺍﺀ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‬
‫)ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻨﻰ(‬
‫ﺧﻀﺮﺍﺀ‪/‬ﺳﻮﺩﺍﺀ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‬
‫)ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺮﻯ(‬
‫ﺃﺭﺟﻮﺍﻧﻴﺔ‪/‬ﺳﻮﺩﺍﺀ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‬
‫)ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻨﻰ(‬
‫ﺃﺧﻀﺮ‬
‫ﺃﺯﺭﻕ‪/‬ﺃﺑﻴﺾ‬
‫ﺑﻨﻲ‬
‫ﺑﻴﻀﺎﺀ‪/‬ﺳﻮﺩﺍﺀ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‬
‫)ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺮﻯ(‬
‫ﺭﻣﺎﺩﻱ‬
‫)ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ(‬
‫)ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻛﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ(‬
‫)‪ (A‬ﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ) ‪(٩‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻼﺕ‪ ،‬ﻓﻼ ﺗﺠﻌﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻚ ﻳﺒﺮﺯ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻳﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻋﺠﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺩﺓ‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻗﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﻐﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ‬
‫ﺃﺭﺟﻮﺍﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺃﺣﻤﺮ‬
‫)‪ (B‬ﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﻳﻨﺔ‬
‫)‪ (C‬ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ‬
‫)‪ (D‬ﺿﻔﻴﺮﺓ ﺍﻷﺳﻼﻙ‬
‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻻﺷﺘﻌﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﻓﻴﻮﺯﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺭﺓ‬
‫)ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻹﺷﻌﺎﻝ(‬
‫ﺃﺻﻔﺮ‬
‫)ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ(‬
‫ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﻓﻴﻮﺯﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺭﺓ‬
‫)‪ (E‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺮﺍﺝ‬
‫ﺃﺳﻮﺩ )ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻷﺭﺿﻲ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﺴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺪﻧﻲ ﺍﻭ ﻫﻴﻜﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺪﻧﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺑﻲ |‬
‫‪23/12/2013 3:05:13 PM‬‬
‫‪١٩‬‬
‫‪JS_KWD_KMM_X50BT_MN_AR_03.indd 19‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ‪ /‬ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ‬
‫•‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻓﻲ ﺳﻴﺎﺭﺓ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺗﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ ‪١٢‬‬
‫ﻓﻮﻟﺖ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﺄﺭﻳﺾ ﺳﻠﺒﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻔﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﺒﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﻼﻙ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ )ﺍﻷﺻﻔﺮ( ﻭﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻹﺷﻌﺎﻝ )ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ(‬
‫ﺑﺸﺎﺳﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻚ ﺍﻷﺭﺿﻲ )ﺳﻮﺩﺍﺀ( ﻟﻤﻨﻊ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﻣﺎﺱ‬
‫ﻛﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻌﺰﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﻼﻙ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻠﺔ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻨﻴﻞ ﻟﻤﻨﻊ‬
‫ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﻣﺎﺱ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻰ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺄﺭﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻣﻊ ﺷﺎﺳﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺭﺓ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫ﻟﺪﻭﺍﻋﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺗﺮﻙ ﻣﻬﻤﺔ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﻼﻙ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻟﻠﻔﻨﻴﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺼﻴﻦ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺸﻴﺮ ﺑﺎﺋﻊ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺴﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﻛﺐ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭﺗﻚ‪ .‬ﻭﻻ ﺗﻠﻤﺲ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍﺀ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺪﻧﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺑﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻗﺼﻴﺮﺓ‪ .‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺪﻧﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻣﺜﻞ ﻣﺒﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺤﺎﻭﻳﺔ ﺳﺎﺧﻨﻴﻦ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ [ ﺃﺳﻼﻙ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺑﺸﺎﺳﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺳﻠﻚ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺭﻳﺾ )ﺳﻮﺩﺍﺀ( ﺃﻭ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﺯﻱ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺃﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ ‪.°٣٠‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻤﺘﻠﻚ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﻼﻙ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺴﻴﺎﺭﺓ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺇﺷﻌﺎﻝ‪،‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻹﺷﻌﺎﻝ )ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ( ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ‬
‫ﻓﻴﻮﺯﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻮﻓﺮ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺗﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ ‪ ١٢‬ﻓﻮﻟﺖ ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ‬
‫ﻭﺇﻳﻘﺎﻓﻪ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻹﺷﻌﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻣﺼﺎﺑﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺍﻣﻞ ﻭﺇﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺣﺎﺕ ﻭﺧﻼﻓﻪ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺳﻠﻴﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺣﺘﺮﺍﻕ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺼﻬﺮ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﺃﻭﻻ ﹰ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﻼﻣﺲ ﺍﻷﺳﻼﻙ‬
‫ﻟﺸﺎﺳﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺭﺓ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺼﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﻳﻢ ﺑﻤﻨﺼﻬﺮ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺑﻨﻔﺲ‬
‫ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪١٨‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺰﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻹﺷﻌﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﻓﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻑ‬
‫[ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﻼﻙ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﻼﻙ‪(١٩ ) .‬‬
‫ﺭﻛﺐ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻓﻲ ﺳﻴﺎﺭﺗﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ )ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺗﺎﺑﻠﻮ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺭﺓ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻃﺮﻑ [ ﺑﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻋﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‪(٣ ) .‬‬
‫‪23/12/2013 3:05:13 PM‬‬
‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ )ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺗﺎﺑﻠﻮ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺭﺓ(‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﻼﻙ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ‪(١٩ ) .‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺎﻑ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ‬
‫ﺗﺎﺑﻠﻮﻩ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﻳﻨﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺜﻨﻲ ﺍﻷﻟﺴﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ‬
‫ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﺈﺣﻜﺎﻡ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ‬
‫‪ ١‬ﺍﻧﺰﻉ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻭﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻤﺤﺎﺫﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﻭﻳﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ )ﻓﻲ ﻛﻼ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺒﻴﻦ( ﻣﻊ ﺭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﺎﻟﺴﻴﺎﺭﺓ ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻏﻲ )ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻕ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻏﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻓﻘﻂ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻏﻲ ﻏﻴﺮ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻔﺎ ﻟﻠﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺤﺔ ﹰ‬
‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‬
‫‪ ١‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻔﻚ ﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺳﻦ ﺍﻹﻣﺴﺎﻙ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺮﺍﺝ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻲ‬
‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺳﺤﺒﻬﺎ ﻟﻠﺨﺎﺭﺝ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺮﺍﺝ ﺑﻌﻤﻖ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺳﻬﻢ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪JS_KWD_KMM_X50BT_MN_AR_03.indd 18‬‬
‫‪Pandora‬‬
‫ﻳﻮﺍﺻﻞ ”‪“READING‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻣﻴﺾ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻘﻀﻲ‬
‫ﻏﻴﺮ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻭﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺤﺔ )ﻣﺜﻼ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻻﻟﺒﻮﻡ(‪.‬‬
‫”‪“ADD ERROR‬‬
‫”‪“SEARCH ERROR‬‬
‫”‪“CHECK DEVICE‬‬
‫”‪“NO SKIPS‬‬
‫”‪“NO STATIONS‬‬
‫”‪“STATION LIMIT‬‬
‫”‪“UPGRADE APP‬‬
‫®‪Bluetooth‬‬
‫”‪“CONNECT ERROR‬‬
‫”‪“RATING ERROR‬‬
‫”‪“LICENSE ERROR‬‬
‫ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻑ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫‪.Bluetooth‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻗﺮﺍﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ‬
‫”‪.“DEVICE FULL‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﻬﺠﺎﺋﻴﺔ )ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻴﺮﺓ(‬
‫ﻭﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻭﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻢ ﻳﻨﺠﺢ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻣﺤﻄﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ‪ Pandora‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻄﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﺜﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺤﻄﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ‪ .‬ﺃﻋﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺎﻭﻟﺔ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻄﺎﺕ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﻭﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻧﻚ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺃﺣﺪﺙ ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ‪Pandora‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺸﻞ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺿﺎ‪/‬ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺮﺿﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﺖ ﺗﺤﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻠﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻘﺪﻳﻢ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ‪ Pandora‬ﺑﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ Bluetooth‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺃﻋﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‪(٣ ) .‬‬
‫• ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻭﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪.Bluetooth‬‬
‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺤﺬﻑ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﻗﺮﺍﻥ ﻣﻦ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻭﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫‪ ،Bluetooth‬ﺛﻢ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻹﻗﺮﺍﻥ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪(١٠ ) .‬‬
‫ﻭﺻﻞ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ‪ .‬ﺃﻋﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺎﻭﻟﺔ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺿﺮﻭﺭﻱ‪(DEVICE DELETE ،١٣ ) .‬‬
‫ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺻﺪﻯ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻮﻳﺶ‪.‬‬
‫ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬
‫ﺳﻴﺌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫• ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻧﺎﺟﺤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ”‪.“N/A VOICE TAG‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ”‪.“NOT SUPPORT‬‬
‫®‪Bluetooth‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﻋﺮﺍﺽ‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ”‪.“iPod ERROR‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺍﻷﻋﻄﺎﻝ‬
‫• ﺃﻋﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟـ ‪.iPod‬‬
‫• ﺃﻋﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ‪.iPod‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﻌﻤﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺴﻠﺴﻼﺕ ﻫﺮﻣﻴﺔ ﻭﺣﻮﺍﻓﻆ ﻛﺜﻴﺮﺓ‬
‫ﺟﺪﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﹰ‬
‫ﺳﺒﺐ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻫﻮ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻻﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﻋﺮﺍﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻻﻋﻄﺎﻝ ﻭﺍﻻﺻﻼﺡ‬
‫• ﺗﻈﻬﺮ”‪. “NO ENTRY‬‬
‫• ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ”‪.“NO PAIR‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ”‪.“ERROR‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ”‪.“NO INFO‬‬
‫ﺗﺘﻢ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺗﺨﻄﻴﻪ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ﺻﻮﺕ‬
‫‪.Bluetooth‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬
‫ﺑﻤﺸﻐﻞ ﺻﻮﺕ‬
‫‪ Bluetooth‬ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻞ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ”‪.“HF ERROR XX‬‬
‫• ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ”‪.“BT ERROR‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺍﻷﻋﻄﺎﻝ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ‪(٩ ) .‬‬
‫ﺍﻓﺤﺺ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ]‪(١١ ) .[ECHO CANCEL‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻭﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪.Bluetooth‬‬
‫ﺣﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﺪﻭﺀﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‬
‫ﺑﻴﺌﺔ‬
‫ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬
‫ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
‫ﹰ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﻴﻨﻚ ﻭﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻧﻄﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺳﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺣﺮﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻮﻕ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻻﺳﻢ ﻫﻮ‬
‫ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻞ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ”ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ“‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﺴﺠﻞ ﻣﻮﺻﻞ‪/‬ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﺜﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻋﺒﺮ‬
‫‪.Bluetooth‬‬
‫ﺃﻋﺪ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻇﻬﺮﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ”‪“ERROR‬‬
‫ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﻓﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻤﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺤﺎﻭﻝ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀﻫﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ Bluetooth‬ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻭﻣﺸﻐﻞ ﺻﻮﺕ‬
‫‪.Bluetooth‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺛﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻭﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬
‫ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﺤﺎﻭﻝ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ‪ Bluetooth‬ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻤﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ﺻﻮﺕ ‪ Bluetooth‬ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻞ‬
‫ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫)‪) .(AVRCP‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻤﺸﻐﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻔﺼﻞ ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ‪ Bluetooth‬ﻭﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﻪ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻋﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻭﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﻭﺇﺫﺍ‬
‫ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺳﺘﺸﺮ ﺃﻗﺮﺏ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﻟﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺑﻲ |‬
‫‪23/12/2013 3:05:14 PM‬‬
‫‪١٧‬‬
‫‪JS_KWD_KMM_X50BT_MN_AR_03.indd 17‬‬
‫ﻣﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻋﺎﻡ‬
‫ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻭﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﺗﻔﺼﻴﻠﻴﺔ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪www.kenwood.com/cs/ce/audiofile/ :‬‬
‫ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫• ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺎﺕ ﺃﻭﺩﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻠﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪:‬‬
‫‪(flac.) FLAC ،(wav.) WAV ،(wma.) WMA ،(mp3.) MP3‬‬
‫• ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ USB‬ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻠﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪،FAT12 :‬‬
‫‪FAT32 ،FAT16‬‬
‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻳﻴﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺬﻛﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻋﺘﻤﺎﺩﹰﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ‪USB‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﺗﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ‪/WMA/MP3‬‬
‫‪ FLAC/WAV‬ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺰﻧﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﻌﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻓﺌﺔ ‪.USB‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ USB‬ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﻣﺠﻤﻊ ﻣﺮﻛﺰﻱ‬
‫‪.USB‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻳﺰﻳﺪ ﻃﻮﻟﻪ ﺍﻹﺟﻤﺎﻟﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﻣﺘﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﻣﺸﺎﻛﻞ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﻠﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ USB‬ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻌﺪﻟﻪ‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﻓﻮﻟﺖ ﻭﻳﺘﺠﺎﻭﺯ ‪ ١‬ﺃﻣﺒﻴﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﻮﻝ ‪ KENWOOD Music Editor Light‬ﻭ‬
‫‪KENWOOD Music Control‬‬
‫• ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫‪ KENWOOD Music Editor Light‬ﻭﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ‬
‫‪.Android™ KENWOOD Music Control‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ‪ KENWOOD Music Editor Light‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫‪ ،KENWOOD Music Control‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻨﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻷﻟﺒﻮﻡ‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﺘﺎﺡ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ‪ KENWOOD Music Editor Light‬ﻭ‬
‫‪ KENWOOD Music Control‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪:‬‬
‫‪www.kenwood.com/cs/ce/‬‬
‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪iPhone/iPod‬‬
‫‪Made for‬‬
‫ ‪ 4th ،3rd ،2nd ،1st) iPod touch‬ﻭ ‪(5th generation‬‬‫ ‪iPod classic‬‬‫ ‪ 6th ،5th ،4th ،3rd) iPod nano‬ﻭ ‪(7th generation‬‬‫ ‪5 ،4S ،4 ،3GS ،iPhone 3G ،iPhone‬‬‫• ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺣﺪﺙ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺃﺣﺪﺙ ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺑﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ‪ ،iPod/iPhone‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ‪:‬‬
‫‪www.kenwood.com/cs/ce/ipod‬‬
‫• ﻟﻦ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ iPod‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ‬
‫”‪ “KENWOOD‬ﺃﻭ “ ” ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪.iPod‬‬
‫ﺣﻮﻝ ‪Pandora‬‬
‫•‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ‪ Pandora‬ﺇﻻ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﻻﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺪﺓ‬
‫ﻭﺃﺳﺘﺮﺍﻟﻴﺎ ﻭﻧﻴﻮﺯﻟﻨﺪﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻈﺮﹰﺍ ﻷﻥ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ‪ Pandora‬ﻫﻮ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺗﻘﺪﻣﻬﺎ ﺟﻬﺔ‬
‫ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺗﺨﻀﻊ ﻟﻠﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺇﺷﻌﺎﺭ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺒﻖ‪ .‬ﻭﺑﻨﺎﺀ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺟﻤﻴﻌﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﻌﺾ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ‪ Pandora‬ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺸﻜﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻨﺸﺄ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ‪ ،‬ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑـ ‪ Pandora‬ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫‪.pandora-support@pandora.com‬‬
‫•‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ‪ Bluetooth‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺑﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ‪ Bluetooth‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻣﻊ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ‪.Bluetooth‬‬
‫ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻈﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻴﻄﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ ‪ ،Bluetooth‬ﺗﻔﻀﻞ‬
‫ﺑﺰﻳﺎﺭﺓ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪www.kenwood.com/cs/ce/ :‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﻧﺒﺬﺓ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ ‪Bluetooth‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻻﻋﻄﺎﻝ ﻭﺍﻻﺻﻼﺡ‬
‫ﺍﻻﻋﺮﺍﺽ‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺳﻤﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ”‪ “PROTECT‬ﻭﻻ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺃﻱ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺳﻤﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻻ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ‬
‫ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﺸﺘﻐﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻘﺒﻞ ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺩﻳﻮ ﺭﺩﻱﺀ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻮﻟﺪ ﺿﺠﻴﺞ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﺗﻴﻜﻲ‬
‫ﺍﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺩﻳﻮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ”‪.“NA FILE‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ”‪.“READ ERROR‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ”‪.“NO DEVICE‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ”‪.“COPY PRO‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ”‪.“NA DEVICE‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ”‪.“NO MUSIC‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺍﻷﻋﻄﺎﻝ‬
‫• ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﻗﻮﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻓﻀﻞ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻓﺤﺺ ﺍﻻﺳﻼﻙ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻼﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺃﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺃﺳﻼﻙ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻐﻄﺎﺓ ﺑﺸﺮﻳﻂ ﻋﺎﺯﻝ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ‪،‬‬
‫ﺛﻢ ﺃﻋﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‪ .‬ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺳﺘﺸﺮ ﺃﻗﺮﺏ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﻟﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻈﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻼﺕ‪(٢ ) .‬‬
‫ﺃﻋﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‪(٣ ) .‬‬
‫• ﺍﻭﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺋﻲ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺤﻜﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺭﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺋﻲ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪ ) .‬ﻣﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ(‬
‫ﺍﻧﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ USB‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺤﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪USB‬‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ USB‬ﺃﺧﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ ،USB‬ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ‬
‫ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ USB‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻣﺤﻤﻲ ﺿﺪ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺻﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ USB‬ﻣﺪﻋﻮﻡ‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﻔﺤﺺ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻼﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ USB‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٦‬‬
‫‪23/12/2013 3:05:14 PM‬‬
‫‪JS_KWD_KMM_X50BT_MN_AR_03.indd 16‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻱ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ‪...‬‬
‫‪ ١‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﻠﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ]‪.[FUNCTION‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪ ،[AUDIO CONTROL‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ )ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻭﻝ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ٣‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻄﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻹﻧﻬﺎﺀ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ‬
‫)ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪(RC-406‬‬
‫‪ ١‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ AUD‬ﻟﻠﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ]‪.[AUDIO CONTROL‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ K / J‬ﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.ENT IW‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺴﻠﺴﻠﻪ ﺍﻟﻬﺮﻣﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫‪SUB-W LEVEL‬‬
‫‪BASS LEVEL‬‬
‫‪MID LEVEL‬‬
‫‪TRE LEVEL‬‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫‪ –15‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ (0) +15‬ﻳﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﻣﻀﺨﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪ –8‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪(+6) +8‬‬
‫‪ –8‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪(+5) +8‬‬
‫‪ –8‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪(0) +8‬‬
‫‪MID ADJUST‬‬
‫‪BASS LEVEL‬‬
‫‪BASS EXTEND‬‬
‫‪ :ON‬ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﺘﺪ‪ .‬؛ ‪ :OFF‬ﺍﻟﻐﺎﺀ‪.‬‬
‫‪MID Q FACTOR‬‬
‫‪TRE ADJUST‬‬
‫‪TRE CTR FRQ‬‬
‫‪TRE LEVEL‬‬
‫‪LPF SUBWOOFER‬‬
‫‪ :THROUGH‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﺒﻮﻭﻓﺮ‪ .‬؛ ‪/120HZ /85HZ‬‬
‫‪ :160HZ‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺻﺒﻮﻭﻓﺮ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺗﺮﺩﺩ ﺃﻗﻞ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ‪ ٨٥‬ﻫﻴﺮﺗﺰ ‪ ١٢٠ /‬ﻫﻴﺮﺗﺰ ‪ ١٦٠/‬ﻫﻴﺮﺗﺰ‪.‬‬
‫‪SUBWOOFER SET‬‬
‫‪SUB-W PHASE‬‬
‫‪ :2.5K /1.5K /1.0K /0.5K‬ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻷﻭﺳﻂ‪.‬‬
‫‪ –8‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ :(+5) +8‬ﻳﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :1.25 /1.00 /0.75‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﻋﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :17.5K /15.0K /12.5K /10.0K‬ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻷﻭﺳﻂ‪.‬‬
‫‪ –8‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ :(0) +8‬ﻳﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :ON‬ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺼﺒﻮﻭﻓﺮ‪ .‬؛ ‪ :OFF‬ﺍﻟﻐﺎﺀ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :(°٠) NORMAL /(°١٨٠) REVERSE‬ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﺭ ﻟﺨﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺼﺒﻮﻭﻓﺮ‬
‫ﻟﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻄﺎﺑ ﹰﻘﺎ ﻟﺨﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﺃﺩﺍﺀ‪) .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪﻩ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻏﻴﺮ ]‪ [THROUGH‬ﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬
‫]‪(.[LPF SUBWOOFER‬‬
‫‪HPF‬‬
‫‪ :THROUGH‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ‪ .‬؛‬
‫‪ :150HZ /120HZ /100HZ‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺫﺍﺕ ﺗﺮﺩﺩ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻦ ‪ ١٠٠‬ﻫﻴﺮﺗﺰ ‪ ١٢٠ /‬ﻫﻴﺮﺗﺰ ‪ ١٥٠/‬ﻫﻴﺮﺗﺰ‪.‬‬
‫‪BALANCE‬‬
‫‪ L15‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ :(0) R15‬ﻳﻀﺒﻂ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺘﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻨﻰ ﻭﺍﻟﻴﺴﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :200 /100 /80 /60‬ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻷﻭﺳﻂ‪.‬‬
‫‪ –8‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ :(+6) +8‬ﻳﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫‪MID LEVEL‬‬
‫‪LOUDNESS‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﻟﺤﻔﻆ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ‪) .‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺿﺒﻄﻪ‪(.‬‬
‫‪ :2.00 /1.50 /1.25 /1.00 BASS Q FACTOR‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﻋﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪MID CTR FRQ‬‬
‫‪BASS BOOST‬‬
‫‪ :LV3 /LV2 /LV1‬ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺭﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪ .‬؛ ‪ :OFF‬ﺍﻟﻐﺎﺀ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :LV2 /LV1‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﻌﺰﻳﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ ﻹﻧﺘﺎﺝ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺕ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺟﻴﺪ ﺑﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ‪ .‬؛ ‪ :OFF‬ﺍﻟﻐﺎﺀ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ‪XX :‬‬
‫‪EQ PRO‬‬
‫‪BASS CTR FRQ BASS ADJUST‬‬
‫‪PRESET EQ‬‬
‫‪/JAZZ /EASY /POPS /ROCK /POWERFUL /TOP40 /DRIVE EQ‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎ ﹺﺩﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﺒﻮﻁ ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺎ ﹰ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻟﻨﻮﻉ‬
‫‪ :USER /NATURAL‬ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﹸ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ‪) .‬ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ]‪ [USER‬ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺠﻬﻴﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﻭﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻘﺔ‪(.‬‬
‫]‪ [DRIVE EQ‬ﻫﻮ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻝ ﻣﻀﺒﻮﻁ ﻣﺴﺒ ﹰﻘﺎ ﻳﻘﻠﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺿﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻖ‪.‬‬
‫‪FADER‬‬
‫‪VOLUME OFFSET‬‬
‫)ﺍﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ‪(0 :‬‬
‫‪SOUND RECNSTR‬‬
‫)ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ(‬
‫‪ R15‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ :(0) F15‬ﻳﻀﺒﻂ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺘﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ –8‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪) +8‬ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟـ ‪ (AUX‬؛ ‪ –8‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪) 0‬ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺼﺎﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ(‪ :‬ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ ﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻜﻞ‬
‫ﻣﺼﺪﺭ‪) .‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺿﺒﻄﻪ‪(.‬‬
‫‪ :ON‬ﻳﺨﻠﻖ ﺻﻮﺗﹰﺎ ﻭﺍﻗﻌﻴﹰﺎ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﻮﻧﺎﺕ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ‬
‫ﻭﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺯﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻌﻮﺩ ﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺿﺎﻋﺖ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ‪ .‬؛ ‪ :OFF‬ﺍﻟﻐﺎﺀ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪/[LPF SUBWOOFER] /[SUBWOOFER SET] / [SUB-W LEVEL‬‬
‫]‪ [SUB-W PHASE‬ﻓﻘﻂ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪ [SWITCH PREOUT‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪(٤ ) .[SUB-W‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪ [SUB-W PHASE] /[LPF SUBWOOFER] / [SUB-W LEVEL‬ﻓﻘﻂ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪ [SUBWOOFER SET‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[ON‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺑﻲ |‬
‫‪23/12/2013 3:05:14 PM‬‬
‫‪١٥‬‬
‫‪JS_KWD_KMM_X50BT_MN_AR_03.indd 15‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫®‪BLUETOOTH‬‬
‫ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ‪Bluetooth‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪Pandora‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻀﻴﺮ‪:‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪ [ON‬ﻟـ ]‪(٤ ) .[PANDORA SRC‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ Pandora‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ )ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ (Android‬ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ‪ Bluetooth‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ١‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻔﺘﺢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ‪ Pandora‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﻭﺻﻞ ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ﺻﻮﺕ ‪(٩ ) .Bluetooth‬‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ B SRC‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻰ ‪.PANDORA‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺪﺭ ﻭﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﺒﺚ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﹰ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ Pandora‬ﺑﻨﻔﺲ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ Pandora‬ﻋﻠﻰ ‪(٩ ) .iPhone/iPod‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ﺻﻮﺕ ‪Bluetooth‬‬
‫‪ ١‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﻠﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫]‪.[FUNCTION‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪ ،[DISPLAY‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ )ﺍﻧﻈﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻭﻝ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ٣‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻄﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻹﻧﻬﺎﺀ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺴﻠﺴﻠﻪ ﺍﻟﻬﺮﻣﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ‪XX :‬‬
‫‪COLOR SELECT‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻭﻣﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺗﻮﺍﻓﺮﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺆﻗﺘﹰﺎ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻓﻪ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﻣﺠﻠﺪ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺫﻟﻚ‬
‫‪ ١‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) B SRC‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ SRC‬ﻓﻲ ‪ (RC-406‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫‪) BT AUDIO‬ﺻﻮﺕ ‪.(Bluetooth‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ﺻﻮﺕ ‪ Bluetooth‬ﻟﻠﺒﺪﺀ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) 6 IW‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ENT IW‬ﻓﻲ ‪.(RC-406‬‬
‫ﺃﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫)ﺃﻭ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ –‪ #FM+ / *AM‬ﻓﻲ ‪.(RC-406‬‬
‫ﺗﺨﻄﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻳﻢ‪/‬ﺍﻹﺭﺟﺎﻉ‬
‫ﺃﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) T / S‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ (+) T / S‬ﻓﻲ ‪.(RC-406‬‬
‫ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫‪ 4‬ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ ﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪REPEAT OFF ،FILE REPEAT ،ALL REPEAT‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺟﻴﻊ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻳﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ‬
‫ﻋﺸﻮﺍﺋﻲ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) T / S‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ (+) T / S‬ﻓﻲ ‪.(RC-406‬‬
‫‪DIMMER‬‬
‫‪BRIGHTNESS‬‬
‫‪TEXT SCROLL‬‬
‫‪/COLOR 24 — COLOR 01 /VARIABLE SCAN‬‬
‫‪ :USER‬ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺇﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻞ ﻟﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻟﻮﻧﻚ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ )ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫]‪) [COLOR 24] — [COLOR 01‬ﻟﻮﻥ ‪) - (١‬ﻟﻮﻥ‬
‫‪ (٢٤‬ﺃﻭ ]‪) [USER‬ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ(‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺃﻧﺸﺄﺗﻪ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺤﺪﺩ ]‪) [USER‬ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ(‪.‬‬
‫‪ ١‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻔﺼﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ T / S‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬
‫)‪) (B /G /R‬ﺃﺣﻤﺮ‪/‬ﺃﺧﻀﺮ‪/‬ﺑﻨﻲ( ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ‬
‫)ﻣﻦ ‪ 0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ،(9‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :ON‬ﻳﻌﺘﻢ ﺇﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬؛ ‪ :OFF‬ﻳﻀﻲﺀ ﻭﻓ ﹰﻘﺎ‬
‫ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ]‪.[BRIGHTNESS‬‬
‫‪ :LVL 31 — LVL 0‬ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻞ ﻹﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺰﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :ONCE /AUTO‬ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺳﺘﻤﺮﺭ‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﹰﺎ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺳﺘﻤﺮﺭ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‬
‫ﻓﻘﻂ‪ .‬؛ ‪ :OFF‬ﺍﻟﻐﺎﺀ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ ﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫‪RANDOM OFF ،FOLDER RANDOM‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”‪.“ALL RANDOM‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫‪١٤‬‬
‫‪23/12/2013 3:05:14 PM‬‬
‫‪JS_KWD_KMM_X50BT_MN_AR_03.indd 14‬‬
‫®‪BLUETOOTH‬‬
‫ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺣﺘﻰ ‪ ٦‬ﺟﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪.Bluetooth‬‬
‫‪ ١‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪ ،[CALL HISTORY‬ﺃﻭ ]‪ ،[PHONE BOOK‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫]‪ ،[NUMBER DIAL‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺭﻗﻢ‬
‫ﻫﺎﺗﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ )ﻣﻦ ‪ 1‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪.(6‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ”‪) “STORED‬ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ( ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻤﺴﺢ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﺒﻮﻃﺔ ﻣﺴﺒ ﹰﻘﺎ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪ [NUMBER DIAL‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪٢‬‬
‫ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻓﺎﺭﻍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪.Bluetooth‬‬
‫‪ ١‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ )ﻣﻦ ‪ 1‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪.(6‬‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﻼﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ”‪ “NO MEMORY‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻣﺨﺰﻧﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻨﻄﺒﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ‪.PBAP‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪.Bluetooth‬‬
‫‪ ١‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪ [CALL HISTORY‬ﺃﻭ ]‪ ،[PHONE BOOK‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﻠﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺬﻑ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪ [DELETE ONE‬ﺃﻭ ]‪ ،[DELETE ALL‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :DELETE ONE‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻻﺳﻢ ﺃﻭ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪.٣‬‬
‫‪ :DELETE ALL‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎﺀ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪.٢‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪) [YES‬ﻧﻌﻢ( ﺃﻭ ]‪) [NO‬ﻻ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪Bluetooth‬‬
‫‪ ١‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﻠﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ]‪.[FUNCTION‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪ ،[BT MODE‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ )ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻭﻝ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻹﻧﻬﺎﺀ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺴﻠﺴﻠﻪ ﺍﻟﻬﺮﻣﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ‪XX :‬‬
‫‪PHONE SELECT‬‬
‫‪AUDIO SELECT‬‬
‫‪DEVICE DELETE‬‬
‫‪DVC PRIORITY‬‬
‫‪*TRANSFER PB‬‬
‫‪PIN CODE EDIT‬‬
‫)‪(0000‬‬
‫‪RECONNECT‬‬
‫‪AUTO PAIRING‬‬
‫‪BT HF/AUDIO‬‬
‫‪INITIALIZE‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺃﻭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺃﻭ ﻗﻄﻊ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ١‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻟﻠﺤﺬﻑ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪) [YES‬ﻧﻌﻢ( ﺃﻭ ]‪) [NO‬ﻻ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﺍ ﹰ ﻟﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﻪ ﻛﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻳﺘﻤﺘﻊ ﺑﺎﻷﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫” “ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺃﻣﺎﻡ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻨﻪ ﻛﺄﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ “DL PB‬ﻭﻳﻨﻘﻞ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻳﺪﻭﻳﹰﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ”‬
‫* ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ )‪(OPP‬‬
‫ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ )ﺣﺘﻰ ‪ ٦‬ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ(‪.‬‬
‫‪ ١‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺭﻗﻢ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ T / S‬ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻋﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺗﻴﻦ ‪ ١‬ﻭ‪ ٢‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﻨﺘﻬﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﻠﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :ON‬ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺑﺈﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﹰﺎ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪Bluetooth‬‬
‫ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ‪ .‬؛ ‪ :OFF‬ﺍﻟﻐﺎﺀ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :ON‬ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺑﺎﻹﻗﺮﺍﻥ ﺑﺎﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ ‪ Bluetooth‬ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻋﻮﻡ‬
‫)‪ (iPod touch/iPhone‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﹰﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﺰﻭﺩ ﺑـ‬
‫‪ .USB‬ﻳﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ‪ iOS‬ﻟﻤﻼﻣﺴﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫‪ iPod touch/iPhone‬ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻞ‪ .‬؛ ‪ :OFF‬ﺍﻟﻐﺎﺀ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :FRONT‬ﺗﺨﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ ﻳﺴﺎﺭﹰﺍ ﻭﻳﻤﻴﻨﹰﺎ‪ .‬؛ ‪ :ALL‬ﺗﺨﺮﺝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺰﻥ‪ ،‬ﻭﺩﻓﺘﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻗﺮﺍﻥ‬
‫ﺫﻟﻚ‪،‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ‬
‫)ﺑﻤﺎ‬
‫‪Bluetooth‬‬
‫‪ :YES‬ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﹸ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪ ،‬ﻭﻏﻴﺮ ﺫﻟﻚ(‪ .‬؛ ‪ :NO‬ﺍﻟﻐﺎﺀ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺑﻲ |‬
‫‪23/12/2013 4:49:22 PM‬‬
‫‪١٣‬‬
‫‪JS_KWD_KMM_X50BT_MN_AR_03.indd 13‬‬
‫®‪BLUETOOTH‬‬
‫‪PHONE BOOK‬‬
‫‪NUMBER‬‬
‫‪DIAL‬‬
‫‪ ١‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﺳﻢ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ ،PBAP‬ﻓﺈﻧﻪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﹰﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻹﻗﺮﺍﻥ‪ .‬ﻭﺇﺫﺍ‬
‫ﻟﻢ ﻳﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ ،PBAP‬ﻓﺴﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ‬
‫”‪ .“TRANSFER PB‬ﺍﻧﻘﻞ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻳﺪﻭﻳﹰﺎ‪.‬‬
‫) ‪(TRANSFER PB ،١٣‬‬
‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺟﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻛﺎﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪) MO :‬ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺟﻮﺍﻝ(‪HM ،‬‬
‫)ﻣﻨﺰﻝ(‪) OF ،‬ﻣﻜﺘﺐ(‪) OT ،‬ﺁﺧﺮ(‪) GE ،‬ﻋﺎﻡ(‬
‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺳﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﺃﻱ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺸﻜﻴﻞ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻨﻄﻖ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ‪) .‬ﻣﺜﻼﹰ‪ ،‬ﻳﻈﻬﺮ‬
‫ﺣﺮﻑ ”‪ “Ú‬ﻓﻲ ﺷﻜﻞ ”‪(.“U‬‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪ ) ،‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻻﺳﻢ(‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺭﻗﻢ )‪ 0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ (9‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺣﺮﻑ ) ‪.(+ ،# ،‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ T / S‬ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻋﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺗﻴﻦ ‪ ١‬ﻭ‪ ٢‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﻨﺘﻬﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺭﻗﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﻼﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪(RC-406‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ )ﻣﻦ ‪ 0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ (9‬ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺭﻗﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻼﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫‪VOICE‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﻄﻖ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪،١١ ) .‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ(‬
‫‪*SIGNAL‬‬
‫‪ :MAX /MID /LOW /NO SIGNAL‬ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﻮﺓ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎ ﹰ‪.‬‬
‫‪*BATT‬‬
‫‪ :FULL /MID /LOW‬ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﻮﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ‪XX :‬‬
‫‪SETTINGS‬‬
‫‪AUTO ANSWER‬‬
‫‪RING MODE‬‬
‫‪*SMS NOTIFY‬‬
‫‪ :30 —1‬ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﹰ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‪ .‬؛‬
‫‪ :OFF‬ﺍﻟﻐﺎﺀ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :SYSTEM‬ﺗﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺭﻧﻴﻨﹰﺎ ﻹﻋﻼﻣﻚ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‪/‬ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻧﺼﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﺭﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻧﻴﻦ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﺇﻗﺮﺍﻧﻪ(‪.‬‬
‫• ‪ :CALL‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻧﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ )‪ (TONE 1 — 5‬ﻟﻠﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫• ‪ :MESSAGE‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻧﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ )‪ (TONE 1 — 5‬ﻟﻠﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﺼﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :PHONE‬ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﺭﻧﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻠﺔ ﻹﻋﻼﻣﻚ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‪/‬‬
‫ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻧﺼﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﺭﺩﺓ‪) .‬ﺳﻴﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻞ ﺭﻧﻴﻨﹰﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺩﻋﻤﻪ ﻟﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺓ(‪.‬‬
‫‪ ON:‬ﺗﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺭﻧﻴﻨﺎ ﹰ ﻭﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ”‪ “SMS RECEIVED‬ﻹﺑﻼﻏﻚ ﺑﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻧﺼﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺍﺭﺩﺓ‪ .‬؛ ‪ :OFF‬ﺍﻟﻐﺎﺀ‪.‬‬
‫* ﺗﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻻﺳﻢ‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻑ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ )ﻣﻦ ‪ A‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ (Z‬ﺃﻭ ﺭﻗﻢ )‪ 0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ (9‬ﺃﻭ ﺭﻣﺰ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻭﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻑ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩﹰﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪.Bluetooth‬‬
‫‪ ١‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪ ،[PHONE BOOK‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻟﻠﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﺍﻟﻬﺠﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ )‪ .(ABCDEFGHIJK‬ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫‪. /‬‬
‫) ‪ WXYZ1‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ،(LMNOPQRSTUV‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ T / S‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻑ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪،‬‬
‫ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ”‪.“1‬‬
‫• ﻟﻠﺒﺤﺚ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ‪ ،‬ﹼ‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ” “‪.‬‬
‫• ﻟﻠﺒﺤﺚ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ‪ ،‬ﹼ‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﺳﻢ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻠﺴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺮﻣﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫‪١٢‬‬
‫‪23/12/2013 3:05:15 PM‬‬
‫‪JS_KWD_KMM_X50BT_MN_AR_03.indd 12‬‬
‫®‪BLUETOOTH‬‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻌﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﺙ ﺍﻟﺤﺮ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﺙ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺻﻮﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻴﻦ‬
‫ﻣﺘﺼﻠﻴﻦ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺫﻟﻚ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ 6 IW‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ Bluetooth‬ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ‬
‫ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪ [00] :‬ﺇﻟﻰ ]‪) [35‬ﺍﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ‪([15] :‬‬
‫• ﻟﻦ ﺗﺆﺛﺮ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻫﺬﻩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫• ﻻ ﻳﻨﻄﺒﻖ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺴﻴﻦ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﺙ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪...‬‬
‫‪ ١‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﻠﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ]‪.[FUNCTION‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ )ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻭﻝ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻹﻧﻬﺎﺀ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺴﻠﺴﻠﻪ ﺍﻟﻬﺮﻣﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ‪XX :‬‬
‫‪MIC GAIN‬‬
‫‪NR LEVEL‬‬
‫‪ECHO CANCEL‬‬
‫‪ :(0) +8 — –20‬ﺗﺰﻳﺪ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﺯﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :(–10) –20 — –5‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺿﺎﺀ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺳﻤﺎﻉ‬
‫ﺃﻗﻞ ﺿﻮﺿﺎﺀ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻣﺤﺎﺩﺛﺔ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :(4) 10 — 1‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺗﺄﺧﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺼﺪﻯ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺳﻤﺎﻉ ﺃﻗﻞ‬
‫ﺻﺪﻯ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺎﺩﺛﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻔﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺷﻌﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﺼﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻠﻘﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻧﺼﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺭﻧﻴﻨﹰﺎ ﻭﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ”‪.“SMS RECEIVED‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻗﺮﺍﺀﺓ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮﻫﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻟﻤﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ ﺯﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫ﻟﺘﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ١‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻞ )ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﺇﻗﺮﺍﻧﻪ ﺃﻭﻻ ﹰ(‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫ﻟﺘﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﻤﺘﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﻤﺘﻊ ﺑﺎﻷﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻷﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ‪(DVC PRIORITY ،١٣ ) .‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻨﻄﻖ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻋﻮﻣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ‪ .‬ﻳﹸﺮﺟﻰ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻞ ﻟﻼﻃﻼﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ‪.iPhone‬‬
‫• ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﹰ‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪Bluetooth‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪.Bluetooth‬‬
‫‪ ١‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ )ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻭﻝ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻹﻧﻬﺎﺀ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺴﻠﺴﻠﻪ ﺍﻟﻬﺮﻣﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫‪CALL‬‬
‫‪HISTORY‬‬
‫‪ ١‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻻﺳﻢ ﺃﻭ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ”‪ “I‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻠﻘﻴﻬﺎ ﻭﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ”‪ “O‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺗﻢ‬
‫ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺅﻫﺎ ﻭﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ”‪ “M‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺩ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ DISP SCRL‬ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻓﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ )‪ NUMBER‬ﺃﻭ ‪.(NAME‬‬
‫• ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ”‪ “NO DATA‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻣﺤﻔﻮﻇﺎﺕ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﻼﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺑﻲ |‬
‫‪23/12/2013 3:05:15 PM‬‬
‫‪١١‬‬
‫‪JS_KWD_KMM_X50BT_MN_AR_03.indd 11‬‬
‫®‪BLUETOOTH‬‬
‫ﺇﻗﺮﺍﻥ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪Bluetooth‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ Bluetooth‬ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻟﻠﻤﺮﺓ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺇﻗﺮﺍﻥ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺇﻛﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﻗﺮﺍﻥ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﻈﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ Bluetooth‬ﻣﺴﺠﻼ ﹰ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺈﻋﺎﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺧﻤﺴﺔ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ )ﺗﻢ ﺇﻗﺮﺍﻧﻬﺎ( ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺇﺟﻤﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻲ ‪ Bluetooth‬ﻭﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺻﻮﺕ ‪ Bluetooth‬ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺑﺤﺪ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻱ ﻭﻗﺖ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻹﻗﺮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﺴﻴﻂ ﺍﻵﻣﻦ )‪.(SSP‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺘﺼﻞ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ‪ Bluetooth‬ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﹰﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻹﻗﺮﺍﻥ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻳﺪﻭﻳﹰﺎ‪ .‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ‪ Bluetooth‬ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ١‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ B SRC‬ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺍﺑﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ )‪ (KMM-X5*BT‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩﻩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫‪.Bluetooth‬‬
‫”‪ “PASS XXXXXX” “PAIRING‬ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ”‪“PRESS‬‬
‫”‪ - “VOLUME KNOB‬ﻟﻠﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﺒﺪﺀ ﺍﻹﻗﺮﺍﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ”‪) “PAIRING OK‬ﺗﻢ ﺍﻹﻗﺮﺍﻥ( ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻛﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﻗﺮﺍﻥ ﻭﻳﻀﻲﺀ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ”‪ “BT‬ﻋﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪.Bluetooth‬‬
‫• ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ‪ ،Bluetooth‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ‬
‫)‪ (PIN‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻔﻌﻴﻞ ﻃﻠﺐ ﺍﻹﻗﺮﺍﻥ )ﻋﺒﺮ ‪ (Bluetooth‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﹰﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ iPhone‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫‪ iPod touch‬ﻣﺘﺼﻼ ﹰ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﺰﻭﺩ ﺑـ ‪) .USB‬ﻻ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺇﻻ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ‬
‫]‪) [AUTO PAIRING‬ﺍﻹﻗﺮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ( ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ]‪) [ON‬ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‪(١٣ ) (.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﻺﻗﺮﺍﻥ ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ‪Bluetooth‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻓﺤﺺ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻋﻮﻡ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ Bluetooth‬ﻭﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ Bluetooth‬ﻣﻮﺻﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ١‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ”‪.“PLEASE PAIR YOUR PHONE‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺍﺑﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ )‪ (KMM-X5*BT‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩﻩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫‪.Bluetooth‬‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ Bluetooth‬ﻟﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺍﻹﻗﺮﺍﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﻣﺾ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ”‪ “TESTING‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ )‪ OK‬ﺃﻭ ‪) (NG‬ﺟﻴﺪﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺟﻴﺪﺓ( ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪ : PAIRING‬ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻹﻗﺮﺍﻥ‬
‫‪ :HF CNT‬ﺗﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻳﻦ )‪(HFP‬‬
‫‪ :AUD CNT‬ﺗﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ )‪(A2DP‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ )‪(PBAP‬‬
‫‪:PB DL‬‬
‫• ﻹﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﺤﺺ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ B SRC‬ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ‪ Bluetooth‬ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻣﻠﺔ‬
‫ﺭﻓﺾ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻭﺍﺭﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺇﻧﻬﺎﺀ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺫﻟﻚ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺣﺪ‬
‫ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ )‪ 1‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪) (6‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫‪.(RC-406‬‬
‫• ﺗﻮﻣﺾ ﺇﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻭﺍﺭﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪ [AUTO ANSWER‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‪ ،‬ﺗﻘﻮﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﹰﺎ‪(١٢ ) .‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) B SRC‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﻓﻲ‬
‫‪.(RC-406‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫‪.(RC-406‬‬
‫ﺃﻭ ‪) B SRC‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﻓﻲ‬
‫‪١٠‬‬
‫‪23/12/2013 3:05:15 PM‬‬
‫‪JS_KWD_KMM_X50BT_MN_AR_03.indd 10‬‬
‫®‪BLUETOOTH‬‬
‫®‪Pandora‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻀﻴﺮ‪:‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺃﺣﺪﺙ ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ‪ Pandora‬ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ )‪ ،(iPod touch /iPhone‬ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻧﺸﺎﺀ‬
‫ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﻭﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪.Pandora‬‬
‫• ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪ [ON‬ﻟـ ]‪(٤ ) .[PANDORA SRC‬‬
‫ﺑﺪﺀ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ‬
‫‪ ١‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻔﺘﺢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ‪ Pandora‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ ﺑﻄﺮﻑ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ‪.USB‬‬
‫ﻃﺮﻑ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ‪USB‬‬
‫ﻛﺒﻞ ‪ USB‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺠﺰﺀ‬
‫‪) KCA-iP102‬ﻣﻠﺤﻖ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻱ( ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‬
‫ﻛﺒﻞ ﻣﻠﺤﻖ ﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫‪*iPhone/iPod‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺪﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪/PANDORA FRONT‬‬
‫‪ PANDORA) PANDORA REAR‬ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ‪/‬‬
‫‪ PANDORA‬ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ( ﻭﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﺒﺚ‪.‬‬
‫* ﻻ ﺗﺘﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺑﻞ ﺑﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪23/12/2013 3:05:15 PM‬‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻣﺆﻗﺘﹰﺎ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻓﻪ‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﺿﺎ ﺃﻭ ﻋﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﺿﺎ‬
‫ﺗﺨﻄﻲ ﻣﺴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻣﺤﻄﺔ‬
‫ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‬
‫ﺣﻔﻆ ﻣﺤﻄﺔ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺫﻟﻚ‬
‫ﺃﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) 6 IW‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ENT IW‬ﻓﻲ ‪.(RC-406‬‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺮﺿﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ‬
‫ﺗﺨﻄﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ‪ Bluetooth‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ‬
‫ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻓﻮﻥ )ﻣﺮﻓﻖ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺃﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) T‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫‪ (+) T‬ﻓﻲ ‪.(RC-406‬‬
‫‪ ١‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺮﺹ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻒ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪) [FROM TRACK‬ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ( ﺃﻭ ]‪) [FROM ARTIST‬ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻨﺎﻥ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻣﺤﻄﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺑﻨﺎﺀ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻔﻨﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ )ﻣﻦ ‪ 1‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪(5‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺤﻄﺔ ﻣﺨﺰﻧﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺣﺪ‬
‫ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ )ﻣﻦ ‪ 1‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪.(5‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫‪ ١‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﻣﺤﻄﺔ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ ‪ ٢‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‬
‫)ﺃﻭ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ K / J‬ﻓﻲ‬
‫‪.(RC-406‬‬
‫]‪ :[BY DATE‬ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻞ‪.‬‬
‫]‪ :[A-Z‬ﺑﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺃﺑﺠﺪﻱ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻒ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻄﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﺎﻣﻄﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻚ )ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺮﻓﻘﺔ( ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺰﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻘﺒﺲ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻓﺼﻞ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ‬
‫ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻓﺼﻞ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪ .Bluetooth‬ﺃﻛﻤﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺎﺩﺛﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻔﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ‪ Bluetooth‬ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻋﻮﻣﺔ‬
‫– ﻭﺿﻊ‬
‫– ﻭﺿﻊ‬
‫– ﻭﺿﻊ‬
‫– ﻭﺿﻊ‬
‫– ﻭﺿﻊ‬
‫– ﻭﺿﻊ‬
‫ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻳﻦ )‪(HFP‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻔﺬ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻠﺴﻠﻲ )‪(SPP‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ )‪(PBAP‬‬
‫ﺩﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺋﻦ )‪(OPP‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ )‪(A2DP‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ )‪(AVRCP‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺑﻲ |‬
‫‪٩‬‬
‫‪JS_KWD_KMM_X50BT_MN_AR_03.indd 9‬‬
‫‪iPod / USB‬‬
‫ﺑﺤﺚ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‬
‫)ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪(RC-406‬‬
‫‪ ١‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.DIRECT‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ENT IW‬ﻟﻠﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻟﻺﻟﻐﺎﺀ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﺎﺡ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺸﻮﺍﺋﻲ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪KMC /KME Light ،iPod‬‬
‫ﻣﻠﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻻﺳﻢ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪...iPod‬‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫‪ ١‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻔﺌﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺑﺤﺚ ﺣﺮﻓﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺪﻝ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﹼ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻨﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ T / S‬ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺛﻼﺛﺔ ﺃﺣﺮﻑ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﺒﺪﺀ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٧‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ٧‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻟﻠﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺑﺨﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻷﺑﺠﺪﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻣﻦ ‪0‬‬
‫ﻭﺣﺘﻰ ‪ ،9‬ﻗﻢ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ ” *“ ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻠﺴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺮﻣﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫• ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪.5 iPod‬‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫• ﻟﻺﻟﻐﺎﺀ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫‪23/12/2013 3:05:16 PM‬‬
‫‪AUX‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺑﺤﺚ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺬﻭﻓﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ iPod‬ﺃﻭ ﻣﻠﻒ ‪...KMC /KME Light‬‬
‫‪ ١‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﻠﺪﺧﻮﻝ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ]‪.[FUNCTION‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪ ،[USB‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫]‪ ،[SKIP SEARCH‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪.‬‬
‫‪) 0.5%‬ﺍﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ(‪ :10% /5% /1% /‬ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺑﺤﺚ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺬﻭﻓﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺟﻤﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻹﻧﻬﺎﺀ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ‪USB‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻴﺔ )ﻓﺌﺔ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻛﺒﻴﺮ( ﺑﻄﺮﻑ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ‪ ،USB‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺗﻪ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ )ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ (SD‬ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻏﺎﻧﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺰﻧﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ ﻋﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ 5 iPod‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺃﻭ(‬
‫‪ ١‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﻠﺪﺧﻮﻝ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ]‪.[FUNCTION‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪ ،[USB‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫]‪ ،[MUSIC DRIVE‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫]‪.[DRIVE CHANGE‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﹰﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ‪ 1‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 4‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ‪ [DRIVE 1] :‬ﺇﻟﻰ ]‪[DRIVE 5‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻀﻴﺮ‪:‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪ [ON‬ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ]‪(٤ ) .[BUILT-IN AUX‬‬
‫ﺑﺪﺀ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ‬
‫‪ ١‬ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ‬
‫)ﻣﺘﺎﺡ ﻟﻠﺸﺮﺍﺀ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ﺻﻮﺕ‬
‫ﻣﺤﻤﻮﻝ‬
‫ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﺻﻐﻴﺮ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺴﻢ‬
‫‪ ٣٫٥‬ﻣﻢ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻮﺻﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﻜﻞ‬
‫ﺣﺮﻑ ”‪) “L‬ﻣﺘﺎﺡ ﻟﻠﺸﺮﺍﺀ(‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ B SRC‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻰ ‪.AUX‬‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ‬
‫ﻭﺑﺪﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﺳﻢ ‪AUX‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻣﺤﻤﻮﻝ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪...‬‬
‫‪ ١‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﻠﺪﺧﻮﻝ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ]‪.[FUNCTION‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪،[SYSTEM‬‬
‫ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫]‪ ،[AUX NAME SET‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪.‬‬
‫‪) AUX‬ﺍﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ(‪/VIDEO /GAME /PORTABLE /DVD /‬‬
‫‪TV‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻹﻧﻬﺎﺀ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ‬
‫‪JS_KWD_KMM_X50BT_MN_AR_03.indd 8‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﻠﻔﹰﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻣﺆﻗﺘﹰﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻓﻪ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻠﻒ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫ﻣﺠﻠﺪ *‪٣‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺟﻴﻊ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻳﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‬
‫ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ *‪٤‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ‬
‫ﻋﺸﻮﺍﺋﻲ *‪٤‬‬
‫*‪١‬‬
‫*‪٢‬‬
‫*‪٣‬‬
‫*‪٤‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺫﻟﻚ‬
‫ﺃﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) 6 IW‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ENT IW‬ﻓﻲ ‪.(RC-406‬‬
‫ﺃﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) T / S‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ (+) T / S‬ﻓﻲ ‪.(RC-406‬‬
‫ﺃﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫)ﺃﻭ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ –‪ #FM+ / *AM‬ﻓﻲ ‪.(RC-406‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) T / S‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫‪ (+) T / S‬ﻓﻲ ‪.(RC-406‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫‪ 4‬ﺑﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻣﻠﻒ ‪ FLAC/WAV/WMA/MP3‬ﺃﻭ ‪،FOLDER REPEAT ،FILE REPEAT :iPod‬‬
‫‪REPEAT OFF‬‬
‫• ‪KENWOOD Music Control /(KME Light) KENWOOD Music Editor Light‬‬
‫)‪ (KMC‬ﻣﻠﻒ ) ‪REPEAT OFF ،FILE REPEAT :(١٦‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺑﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻣﻠﻒ ‪ FLAC/WAV/WMA/MP3‬ﺃﻭ ‪ iPod‬ﺃﻭ ﻣﻠﻒ ‪:KMC /KME Light‬‬
‫‪RANDOM OFF ،FOLDER RANDOM‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫‪ 3‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”‪.“ALL RANDOM‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺘﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺑﻞ ﺑﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﺰﺍﻝ ﺑﺈﻣﻜﺎﻧﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﺨﻄﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻳﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺮﺟﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻘﻂ ﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ‪ .FLAC/WAV/WMA/MP3‬ﻻ ﻳﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻣﻊ ‪.iPod‬‬
‫ﻟﻤﻮﺩﻳﻠﻲ ‪ :iPod‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﻪ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪.[MODE OFF‬‬
‫‪iPod / USB‬‬
‫ﻟﻤﻮﺩﻳﻠﻲ ‪ :iPod‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﻪ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫]‪(٦ ) .[MODE OFF‬‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫‪ ١‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻣﻠﻒ ‪ :FLAC/WAV/WMA/MP3‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‪.‬‬
‫• ‪ iPod‬ﺃﻭ ‪ KMC /KME Light‬ﻣﻠﻒ‪ :‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ )‪،ARTISTS ،PLAYLISTS‬‬
‫‪،GENRES ،*PODCASTS ،SONGS ،ALBUMS‬‬
‫‪.(*COMPOSERS‬‬
‫* ﻓﻘﻂ ﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ‪.iPod‬‬
‫• ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ )ﺃﻭ ﺃﻭﻝ ﻣﻠﻒ(‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ‬
‫ﺭﻗﻢ ‪.5 iPod‬‬
‫• ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺴﻠﺴﻠﻪ ﺍﻟﻬﺮﻣﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‪،‬‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫• ﻟﻺﻟﻐﺎﺀ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﻋﺪﺓ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ‪...‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﺧﻼﻟﻬﺎ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ )ﺑﺎﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ٢‬ﺃﻋﻼﻩ(‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺑﺤﺚ ﻣﺤﺬﻭﻓﺎﺕ ﻣﻀﺒﻮﻃﺔ ﻣﺴﺒ ﹰﻘﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫‪.T / S‬‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ‪(٨ ) .‬‬
‫• ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ”ﺿﺒﻂ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺑﺤﺚ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺬﻭﻓﺎﺕ“ ﹰ‬
‫• ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ T / S‬ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺗﺨﻄﻲ ﺍﻷﻏﺎﻧﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺼﻮﻯ )‪ (%١٠‬ﺃﻳﹰﺎ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺅﻩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻟﻤﻮﺩﻳﻠﻲ ‪ :USB‬ﻓﻘﻂ ﻟﻠﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺅﻫﺎ ﻣﻊ ‪.KMC /KME Light‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺑﻲ |‬
‫‪23/12/2013 3:05:16 PM‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫‪JS_KWD_KMM_X50BT_MN_AR_03.indd 7‬‬
‫ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮ‬
‫‪TI‬‬
‫‪ :ON‬ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﺡ ﻟﻠﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ‪ .‬؛ ‪ :OFF‬ﺍﻟﻐﺎﺀ‪.‬‬
‫‪PTY SEARCH‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﻠﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻟﻐﺔ ‪ .PTY‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺹ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻟﻐﺔ ‪ ،(GERMAN /FRENCH /ENGLISH) PTY‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ )ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪T / S‬‬
‫ﻟﺒﺪﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪TIME SYNC‬‬
‫‪ :ON‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﻊ ﻭﻗﺖ ﻣﺤﻄﺔ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺩﻳﻮ‪ .‬؛‬
‫‪ :OFF‬ﺍﻟﻐﺎﺀ‪.‬‬
‫‪iPod / USB‬‬
‫ﺑﺪﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺪﺭ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﹰﺎ ﻭﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪USB‬‬
‫‪CA-U1EX‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ‪(mA ٥٠٠ :‬‬
‫)ﺇﻛﺴﺴﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻱ(‬
‫‪CLOCK‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪[PTY SEARCH] /[TI] /[AF SET] /[REGIONAL] /[NEWS SET] /[MONO SET‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ‪ FM3 /FM2 /FM1‬ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺡ‪:‬‬
‫‪) INFO ،AFFAIRS ،NEWS :SPEECH‬ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ(‪،DRAMA ،EDUCATE ،SPORT ،‬‬
‫‪،CHILDREN ،FINANCE ،WEATHER ،VARIED ،SCIENCE ،CULTURE‬‬
‫‪DOCUMENT ،LEISURE ،TRAVEL ،PHONE IN ،RELIGION ،SOCIAL‬‬
‫‪) POP M :MUSIC‬ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ(‪) ROCK M ،‬ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ(‪) EASY M ،‬ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ(‪،‬‬
‫‪) LIGHT M‬ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ(‪) OTHER M ،CLASSICS ،‬ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ(‪،JAZZ ،‬‬
‫‪) NATION M ،COUNTRY‬ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ(‪) FOLK M ،OLDIES ،‬ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ(‬
‫ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﺒﺤﺚ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻋﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻨﻒ ﺗﺤﺖ ]‪ [SPEECH‬ﺃﻭ ]‪ [MUSIC‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪﻩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺪﻝ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﹰﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪﺓ‬
‫ﻃﺮﻑ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ‪USB‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ /‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﻛﺒﻞ ‪ USB‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺠﺰﺀ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‬
‫‪iPhone/iPod‬‬
‫ﻃﺮﻑ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ‪USB‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ /‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﻛﺒﻞ ‪ USB‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺠﺰﺀ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‬
‫‪) KCA-iP102‬ﻣﻠﺤﻖ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻱ( ﻛﺒﻞ ﻣﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ‪١*iPhone/iPod‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ 5 iPod‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﻪ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ‪.iPod‬‬
‫‪ :MODE ON‬ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪.٢*iPod‬‬
‫‪ :MODE OFF‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪ iPhone/iPod‬ﺑﻄﺮﻑ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ‪ USB‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ )ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ TuneIn Radio‬ﺃﻭ ‪ TuneIn Radio Pro‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ،(Aupeo‬ﻓﺴﻴﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫ﺑﺈﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫‪23/12/2013 3:05:16 PM‬‬
‫‪JS_KWD_KMM_X50BT_MN_AR_03.indd 6‬‬
‫ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﻣﺤﻄﺔ‬
‫‪ ١‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ B SRC‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻰ ‪.TUNER‬‬
‫ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭﺓ )ﺃﻭ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ –‪ #FM+ / *AM‬ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪BAND‬‬
‫‪ (RC-406‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ‪.SW2 /SW1 /MW /FM3 /FM2 /FM1‬‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) T / S‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ (+) T / S‬ﻓﻲ ‪(RC-406‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﻣﺤﻄﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻟـ ‪ : T / S‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪SEEK‬‬
‫‪ :AUTO1‬ﻳﺒﺤﺚ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﹰ ﻋﻦ ﻣﺤﻄﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :AUTO2‬ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﻣﺤﻄﺔ ﻣﻌﺪﺓ ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :MANUAL‬ﻳﺒﺤﺚ ﻳﺪﻭﻳﹰﺎ ﻋﻦ ﻣﺤﻄﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻟﺤﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻄﺔ‪ :‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ )ﻣﻦ ‪ 1‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪.(6‬‬
‫• ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺰﻧﺔ‪ :‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ )ﻣﻦ ‪ 1‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪) (6‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ )ﻣﻦ ‪ 1‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ (6‬ﻓﻲ ‪.(RC-406‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺗﺮﺩﺩ ﻣﻦ‪:‬‬
‫‪ ٥٠ : FM‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﻫﺮﺗﺰ ﺍﻟﻰ ‪ ٢٠٠‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﻫﺮﺗﺰ‬
‫‪ ٩ :MW‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﻫﺮﺗﺰ ﺍﻟﻰ ‪ ١٠‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﻫﺮﺗﺰ‬
‫‪ ١‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ B SRC‬ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭﻱ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ‪ 1‬ﻭ ‪ ،5‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.B SRC‬‬
‫ﺍﺭﻓﻊ ﺃﺻﺎﺑﻌﻚ ﻣﻦ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻲ‪ ،‬ﻛﺮﺭ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻣﺤﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺰﻧﺔ ﺳﺎﺑ ﹰﻘﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﻟﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ )ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪(RC-406‬‬
‫‪ ١‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ DIRECT‬ﻟﻠﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻮﻟﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ENT IW‬ﻟﻠﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﻣﺤﻄﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻭ ‪.DIRECT‬‬
‫• ﻟﻺﻟﻐﺎﺀ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫• ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺃﻱ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ‪ ١٠‬ﺛﻮﺍ ﹴﻥ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ،٢‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺗﻮﻟﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﹰﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫‪ ١‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﻠﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ]‪.[FUNCTION‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ )ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻭﻝ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻹﻧﻬﺎﺀ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺴﻠﺴﻠﻪ ﺍﻟﻬﺮﻣﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ‪XX :‬‬
‫‪TUNER SETTING‬‬
‫‪LOCAL SEEK‬‬
‫‪ :ON‬ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻄﺎﺕ ‪ SW2 /SW1 /MW‬ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺠﻴﺪ ﻓﻘﻂ‪ .‬؛‬
‫‪ :OFF‬ﺍﻟﻐﺎﺀ‪.‬‬
‫‪MONO SET‬‬
‫‪ :ON‬ﻳﺤﺴﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ‪ FM‬ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﺘﺮﻳﻮ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻓﻘﺪﻩ‪ .‬؛‬
‫‪ :OFF‬ﺍﻟﻐﺎﺀ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :YES AUTO MEMORY‬ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﹰﺎ ﺣﻔﻆ ‪ ٦‬ﻣﺤﻄﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺟﻴﺪ‪ .‬؛ ‪ :NO‬ﺍﻟﻐﺎﺀ‪) .‬ﻗﺎﺑﻞ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪ [NORMAL‬ﻣﻊ ﻭﺿﻊ ]‪(.[PRESET TYPE‬‬
‫) ‪(٤‬‬
‫‪NEWS SET‬‬
‫‪REGIONAL‬‬
‫‪AF SET‬‬
‫ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺎ‪ .‬؛‬
‫‪ :ON‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﺘﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻣﺆﻗﺘﹰﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻷﺧﺒﺎﺭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ‬
‫ﹰ‬
‫‪ :OFF‬ﺍﻟﻐﺎﺀ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :ON‬ﻳﺘﺤﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺤﻄﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ”‪ .“AF‬؛ ‪ :OFF‬ﺍﻟﻐﺎﺀ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :ON‬ﻳﺒﺤﺚ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﹰﺎ ﻋﻦ ﻣﺤﻄﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺗﺒﺚ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ‬
‫‪ Radio Data System‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ﺳﻴﺊ‪ .‬؛‬
‫‪ :OFF‬ﺍﻟﻐﺎﺀ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺑﻲ |‬
‫‪23/12/2013 3:05:16 PM‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪JS_KWD_KMM_X50BT_MN_AR_03.indd 5‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ )ﺃﻭ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ(‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪:‬‬
‫”‪“VOLUME KNOB” “PRESS” “CANCEL DEMO‬‬
‫‪ ١‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪ [YES‬ﻛﺈﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﺒﺪﺋﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ”‪.“DEMO OFF‬‬
‫‪ ١‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﻠﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ]‪.[FUNCTION‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪ ،[CLOCK‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪ ،[CLOCK ADJUST‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻮﻡ ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪ ،[CLOCK FORMAT‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪ [12H‬ﺃﻭ ]‪ ،[24H‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻹﻧﻬﺎﺀ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٧‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺴﻠﺴﻠﻪ ﺍﻟﻬﺮﻣﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ‪...‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ DISP SCRL‬ﻟﻠﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺛﻢ ﻧﻔﺬ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ٤‬ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺪﺋﻴﺔ‬
‫‪ ١‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ B SRC‬ﻟﻠﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪.STANDBY‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﻠﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ]‪.[FUNCTION‬‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ )ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻭﻝ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻹﻧﻬﺎﺀ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺴﻠﺴﻠﻪ ﺍﻟﻬﺮﻣﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ‪XX :‬‬
‫‪AUDIO CONTROL‬‬
‫‪ :SUB-W /REAR SWITCH PREOUT‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺻﺒﻮﻭﻓﺮ ﻣﻮﺻﻠﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺑﺄﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﻣﺨﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺨﻂ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺆﺧﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ )ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻣﻜﺒﺮ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ(‪.‬‬
‫‪SP SELECT‬‬
‫‪ :OEM /6/9 × 6 /4/5 /OFF‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﻓ ﹰﻘﺎ ﻟﺤﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ )‪-٥‬ﺑﻮﺻﺔ ﺃﻭ‬
‫‪-٤‬ﺑﻮﺻﺔ‪-٩X٦ ،‬ﺑﻮﺻﺔ ﺃﻭ ‪-٦‬ﺑﻮﺻﺔ( ﺃﻭ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ‪ OEM‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻷﻣﺜﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪TUNER SETTING‬‬
‫‪PRESET TYPE‬‬
‫‪ :NORMAL‬ﻳﺘﺬﻛﺮ ﻣﺤﻄﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺯﺭ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﺴﺒﻖ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ‬
‫)‪ .(SW2 /SW1 /MW /FM3 /FM2 /FM1‬؛ ‪ :MIX‬ﻳﺘﺬﻛﺮ ﻣﺤﻄﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺯﺭ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺒﻖ ﺑﻐﺾ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪KEY BEEP‬‬
‫‪ :ON‬ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ‪ .‬؛ ‪ :OFF‬ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺸﻴﻂ‪.‬‬
‫‪SYSTEM‬‬
‫‪TDF ALARM‬‬
‫‪ :ON‬ﻳﻨﺸﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺬﻳﺮ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻧﺴﻴﺖ ﻓﺼﻞ ﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ‪ ACC‬ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ .OFF‬؛‬
‫‪ :OFF‬ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺸﻴﻂ‪.‬‬
‫‪SOURCE SELECT‬‬
‫‪ :ON PANDORA SRC‬ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ‪ PANDORA‬ﻓﻲ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺪﺭ‪ .‬؛ ‪ :OFF‬ﻣﻌﻄﻞ‪(٩ ) .‬‬
‫‪BUILT-IN AUX‬‬
‫‪ :ON‬ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ‪ AUX‬ﻓﻲ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺪﺭ‪ .‬؛ ‪ :OFF‬ﻣﻌﻄﻞ‪(٨ ) .‬‬
‫‪F/W UPDATE‬‬
‫‪UPDATE SYSTEM/ UPDATE BT‬‬
‫‪ :YES F/W UP xx.xx‬ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺗﺮﻗﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺖ‪ .‬؛ ‪ :NO‬ﻳﻠﻐﻲ )ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻗﻴﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻨﺸﻄﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺖ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ‪:‬‬
‫‪www.kenwood.com/cs/ce/‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪23/12/2013 3:05:16 PM‬‬
‫‪JS_KWD_KMM_X50BT_MN_AR_03.indd 4‬‬
‫ﹺ‬
‫ﺃﹶ‬
‫ﺳﺎﺳ ﹼﻴﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫ﺭﻳﻤﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ )‪(RC-406‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺣﺴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ )ﺗﺠﻨﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ‬
‫ﻟﻀﻮﺀ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻃﻊ‪(.‬‬
‫ﻗﺮﺹ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺭﺍﻥ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ(‬
‫ﻓﺼﻞ‬
‫ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺴﺤﺐ ﻏﻄﺎﺀ ﻋﺎﺯﻝ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺀ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻷﻭﻝ ﻣﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﻴﻒ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬
‫ﻛﻴﻒ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻄﻬﺎ ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺎ ﹰ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻭﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺫﻟﻚ )ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ(‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.B SRC‬‬
‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ B SRC‬ﺑﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ DISP SCRL‬ﺑﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺫﻟﻚ )ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺭﻳﻤﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ(‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ SRC‬ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫) ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ SRC‬ﻻ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪( .‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫‪ VOL‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫‪.VOL‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ATT‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻟﺘﺨﻔﻴﻒ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﻮﻗﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ SRC‬ﺑﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ‪.‬‬
‫) ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﺎﺡ (‬
‫ﻋﺮﺑﻲ |‬
‫‪23/12/2013 3:05:17 PM‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪JS_KWD_KMM_X50BT_MN_AR_03.indd 3‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﹺ‬
‫ﺃﹶ‬
‫ﺳﺎﺳ ﹼﻴﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪iPod / USB‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫®‪Pandora‬‬
‫‪٩‬‬
‫ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮ‬
‫‪AUX‬‬
‫®‪BLUETOOTH‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫‪٩‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫‪١٤‬‬
‫ﻣﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫‪١٦‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ‪ /‬ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‬
‫‪١٨‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫‪١٥‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻻﻋﻄﺎﻝ ﻭﺍﻻﺻﻼﺡ ‪١٦‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ‬
‫‪٢٠‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺃﻱ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻗﺪ ﺗﺠﺬﺏ ﺍﻧﺘﺒﺎﻫﻚ ﺑﻌﻴﺪﺍ ﹰ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻵﻣﻨﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪:‬‬
‫• ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺳﻤﺎﻉ ﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺭﺓ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺠﻨﺐ ﺍﻟﺤﻮﺍﺩﺙ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﺨﻔﻴﺾ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻱ ﻣﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﺭﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﺠﻨﺐ ﺿﺮﺭ ﻣﻜﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺰﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺟﺌﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﺝ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﺎﻡ‪:‬‬
‫• ﺗﺠﻨﺐ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ USB‬ﺃﻭ ‪ iPhone/iPod‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻌﺘﺮﺽ ﺳﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﻣﺔ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻢ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻧﺴﺦ ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻲ ﻟﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻻ ﻧﺘﺤﻤﻞ ﺃﻳﺔ ﻣﺴﺆﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺧﺴﺎﺭﺓ ﻟﻠﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻀﻊ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺘﺮﻙ ﺃﻱ ﺃﺟﺴﺎﻡ ﻣﻌﺪﻧﻴﺔ )ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻼﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺪﻧﻴﺔ( ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻟﻤﻨﻊ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺍﻧﻘﻄﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﻳﻤﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ )‪:(RC-406‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻀﻊ ﺭﻳﻤﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺳﺎﺧﻨﺔ ﻣﺜﻞ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻥ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﻴﺜﻴﻮﻡ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺍﻧﻔﺠﺎﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻟﻬﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺄﺧﺮﻯ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﻧﻮﻉ ﻣﻜﺎﻓﺊ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﺠﺐ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﻋﺒﻮﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻟﻠﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺮﻃﺔ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺿﻮﺀ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻠﻬﺐ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺎ ﺷﺎﺑﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﻴﺪﺍ ﻋﻦ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻷﻃﻔﺎﻝ ﻭﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻋﺒﻮﺗﻬﺎ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻻ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‪ .‬ﺗﺨﻠﺺ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻓﻮﺭﹰﺍ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺃﺑﻖ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﹰ‬
‫ﻭﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺑﺘﻼﻋﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻄﺒﻴﺐ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻴﺎﻧﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪ :‬ﺍﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺏ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺳﻠﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﺟﺎﻑ ﺃﻭ ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﻗﻤﺎﺵ‬
‫ﻧﺎﻋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻞ‪ :‬ﻓﻚ ﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻭﻧﻈﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻞ ﺑﺮﻓﻖ ﺑﻘﻄﻌﺔ ﻗﻄﻦ‪ ،‬ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﻋﺪﻡ ﺇﺗﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻞ )ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ(‬
‫ﻛﻴﻒ ﺗﻘﺮﺃ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ‬
‫• ﺃﻭﺿﺤﺖ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺭﺋﻴﺴﻲ ﺃﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﺟﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ]‪ [XX‬ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫• ) ‪ (XX‬ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪23/12/2013 3:05:17 PM‬‬
‫‪JS_KWD_KMM_X50BT_MN_AR_03.indd 2‬‬
KMM-X50BT
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎ ﺕ‬
© 2013 JVC KENWOOD Corporation
JS_KWD_KMM_X50BT_MN_C001A_AR.indd 1
Data Size:
Book Size:
B6L (182 mm x 128 mm)
B6L (182 mm x 128 mm)
23/12/2013 3:46:52 PM